Skip to main content

Full text of "Twilight Zone v09n02 (1989 06) (noads)"

See other formats



3NN3A3HD 


DISPLAY UNTIL MAY 22 


asa id 9nix mi 

DOT 1?S1 3D1M lii361V 

090 3*407 UCGN> I T T 3Db7 CO 78 

OOM NOT 






22 RETURN OF THE ZONE: PART 5 by J. Michael Straczynski 

The final chapter of our series on the new Twilight Zone TV show. 

Beaumont Lives! A Special Tribute 
48 REMEMBERING CHARLES BEAUMONT by Roger Anker 

A look back at one of The Twilight’s Zone’s most brilliant writers. 

54 YOUR THREE MINUTES ARE UP by George Clayton Johnson 

A long-distance call from an old friend. 

66 ROD SERLING'S NIGHT GALLERY: PART 11 

by Kathryn Drennan and J. Michael Straczynski 

Our continuing guide to Serlings second fantasy series. 

79 TZ TELEPLAY: NOTHING IN THE DARK 
by George Clayton Johnson 


Page 42 


6 IN THE TWILIGHT ZONE 
8 EDITOR'S NOTE 
10 LETTERS 
12 BOOKS by Ed Bryant 
16 SCREEN by Gahan Wilson 
41 TZ QUIZ 

88 TZ SCREENING ROOM 

18 THE MIND'S EAR by Jillian Smith and Margaret Mayo McGlynn 

A special report on the audio fiction experience. 

Cover art by Gottfried Helnweinn 

Rod Selling's Twilight Zone Magazine (Issn # 0279-6090) June, 1989, Volume 9, Number 2, is published bimonthly (February, 
p'kW ' 9? ober - December) in the United States and simultaneously in Canada by TZ Publications, a division of 
Toso'ht T 7 p b m hln 5 Cor D 01 j c 0 ",'. 40 ? ^ Atom* South, New York, NY. 10016-8802. Telephone (212) 779-8900. Copyright c 
1989 by TZ Publications. Rod Serlings The Twilight Zone Magazine is published pursuant to a license from Carol Serling and 
V a ^ tnte , rpnS f S ' a < 7z Vls,0n ° f V,acom International, Inc All rights reserved. Second-class postage paid at New York, N Y and 
at additional mailing offices. Return postage must accompany all unsolicited material. The publisher assumes no responsibility 
AH °i F’sohci ted materials. All rights reserved on material accepted for publication unless otherwise specified. 

sei \ t . to Rod Serlings The Twilight Zone Magazine or to its editors are assumed intended for publication. Nothing may 
be reproduced in whole or in part without written permission from the publisher. Any similarity between persons appearing in 
fiction and real persons living or dead is coincidental. Single copies $2.50 in U.S., U.S. military bases, and U.S. possessions, $3 00 
elsewhere. Subscriptions: U.S.. U.S. militarv. and IIS nr*cc*»cci™>c Sit; <;n. da an ah i u ue 


"V c u ,,v 1S , coincidental. Single copies *2.50 in U.S., U.S. military bases, and U.S. possessions, $3. 

elsewhere Subscriptions: U.S.. U.S. military, and U.S. possessions, $15.50; $18.50 elsewhere. All orders must be paid in U 
currency. Member, Audtt Bureau of CirculaHons. Postmaster: Send address changes to Rod Setting's The Twilight Zone Magazi, 
P.O. Box 252, Mt. Morns, IL 61054-0252. Printed in the U.S.A. 5 


Page 79 


JUST ANOTHER PERFECT DAY by John Varley 

What if today were really the first day of your life? 

TZ FIRST: MAGGIE by Dan Bennett 
Only she knew the secret of the perfect gift. 

TZ FIRST: SPUDS by Terry Runte 

His side dish refused to stay on the sidelines. 

THE CARNIVAL by Charles Beaumont 
A carnival's magic may sometimes turn dark and strange. 
TIMED EXPOSURE by Richard Christian Matheson 
The camera's eye can reveal more than one wants to see. 
EXODUS: 22:18 by Nancy Baker 
He'd vowed to destroy the Queen of Darkness. 


26 

34 

38 

42 

58 

62 





IT 


♦ " 


IN THE 

TWILIGHT ZONE 

Television Land 


ome evenings, when we're working late on the magazine, we get a 
weird feeling that if we turned around quickly enough, the walls 
would peel back to reveal a television crew set up behind us. At times, 
it seems as if we're trapped inside a TV program. We're not sure if it's 
a comedy or a drama, but all the elements are here: Tension and excitement, 
tragedy mixed with broad farce, the usual cast of eccentric characters .... 

If you think about it, we're not the only people who look at the world this 
way —everyone does. Look around you. TV is our frame of reference; our com- 
mon language. Though we may not want to admit it, television - with all its 
faults — is the most important art form of this century. 

So come with us as we pay tribute to that art form; past, present, and fu- 
ture. Our first presentation on the "TZ Network" is a special feature on one of 
the most influential fantasy writers of our time -Charles Beaumont, a brilliant 
and prolific screenwriter who was second only to Rod Serling in his contribu- 
tions to The Twilight Zone. We begin with a recently rediscovered Beaumont 
tale, "The Carnival," one of several previously unpublished stories in a new col- 
lection, Charles Beaumont: Selected Stories (Dark Harvest Press), edited by 
Roger Anker. In his essay, "Remembering Charles Beaumont," Anker gives us an 
intimate look back at this remarkable writer through the eyes of those who 
knew him best. 

One of the central members of Beaumont's circle, George Clayton Johnson, 
contributes an intriguing meditation on his association with Beaumont in "Your 
Three Minutes Are Up." Co-author of Logan's Run with William F. Nolan, and 
a screenwriter on Twilight Zone— The Movie, Johnson wrote several of The 
Twilight Zone's most memorable episodes, including this issue's TZ Teleplay, 
"Nothing in the Dark." (That's young George Clayton Johnson with Robert Red- 
ford in the photo on the contents page, by the way!) 

As evidence that the creative fire of fantasy is still alive and well in Televi- 
sion Land, Kathryn M. Drennan and J. Michael Straczynski continue their se- 
ries on Rod Seriing's Night Gallery; and Straczynski offers his final chapter in 
the stranger-than-fiction saga of the making of the new syndicated Twilight 
Zone (aka TZ3") in Return of the Zone. And, as proof that there's more to fan- 
tasy than meets the eyes, Jillian Smith and Margaret Mayo McGlynn give us 
their personal impressions of that very old and very new medium, audio fic- 
tion, in a special section called "The Mind's Ear." 

We also present several fictional "mind-plays" this issue, beginning with 
Just Another Perfect Day"; a compelling tale about the nature of memory and 
love, by John Varley, award-winning author of the Gaea Trilogy. We've also got 
a chiller from Richard Christian Matheson entitled "Timed Exposure," as well as 
two TZ Firsts: "Maggie," by Dan Bennett (a graduate of the Clarion Writing 
Workshop), is a bittersweet tale of simple magic. "Spuds," by Terry Runte, is a 
wonky look at the world of talking tubers. Runte has published a lot of hu- 
morous nonfiction, but this is his first fiction sale. And finally, Nancy Baker, 
whose story, "The Party Over There" (April '88), was one of our earliest TZ Firsts, 
rejoins us with "Exodus 22:18," a nasty little trip into the mind of a maniac 

With that, it's time we got back to work here in the TZ soundstage. But 
dont go away. We'll be right back after this brief commercial message. . . 




John Varley 


6 TWILIGHT ZONE 


PHOTO BY RICIA MAINHARnT 


EDITOR’S 

NOTES 

Synergy 



CORPORATE 
President and Publisher 
S. Edward Orenstein 
Executive Vice Presidents, Corporate 
Brian D. Orenstein 
Russell T. Orenstein 

Associate Publisher and Consulting Editor 

Carol Serling 
EDITORIAL 

Editorial Director, Corporate 
Marc Lichter 
Editor-in-Chief 
Tappan King 

Managing Editor 
Peter R. Emshwiller 
Assistant Editor 
Margaret Mayo McGlynn 
Reader 

Rich Friedman 

Contributing Editors 

Gahan Wilson • James Verniere 
Edward Bryant 
J. Michael Straczynski 
Kathryn M. Drennan 

ART 

Design Director, Corporate 
Michael Monte 
Art Director 
Tom Waters 
Art Production 
Mark VanTine 

PRODUCTION 
Vice President, Production 

Stephen J. Fallon 

Typesetting 

Irma Lance • Ron Stark 

ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE 
Vice President, Treasurer 

Chris Grossman 

Accounting Manager 
Saul Steinhaus 
Accounting Assistants 
Asnar Angeles • Evelyn Cruz 
John Ubanwa 
Office Manager 
Margaret Inzana 
Office Assistant 
Gina Cruz 
Traffic 

Oniel Pagan 
Traffic Assistant 
Gloria Cruz 

ADVERTISING 

Advertising Production Manager 

Theresa Martorano 
Advertising Assistant 
Belinda Davila 

CIRCULATION / PROMOTION 
Vice President, Sales and Operations 

Michael Dillon 

Subscription Manager 
Dean Lage 
Promotion Manager 

Cecelia Giunta 

Promotion Assistant 
Suzie Goodman 
Direct Sales Manager 
Judy Linden 
A.rt Designer 

Gregory Lawrence Stewart 


ast Halloween, I found myself in the middle of a debate between two 
of Britain's most terrifying writers. When I say "in the middle," I mean 
it literally. I was part of a panel discussion at the World Fantasy Con- 
vention in London about the differences between working in print and 
in film. On my right sat James Herbert, Britain's most successful horror writer, 
whose novel. The Enchanted Cottage, is currently being adapted for film. On 
my left was Clive Barker, the phenomenally popular author of The Books of 
Blood, who directed Hellraiser and produced its sequel. 

"I myself would never work in film," Herbert was saying. "It would be too 
frustrating. When I'm writing a novel, I have complete control over how every- 
thing turns out. Once it gets into the hands of filmmakers, it invariably changes 
into something different. That's why I never let others adapt my novels for film 
unless I'm reasonably sure they're going to do things my way." 

Barker had a different point of view: "I enjoy filmmaking. It's a different 
experience entirely from writing prose. It's rather fun, actually, so long as you 
go into it with the understanding that you're part of a team, and you can't do 
it all yourself. You have to surrender yourself to the process, but if you do, you 
can get amazing things done. Besides, if you've got fantastically talented people 
working with you, you'd be a fool not to make use of those talents." 

There's a lot to be said for James Herbert's fiercely independent stance. It's 
important to have faith in your own vision, and to be willing to act on that 
vision, no matter what anyone says — especially if you choose to devote your- 
self to a creative profession such as writing. And it's very satisfying to be pro- 
ducer, director, cast and crew of your own mind-movie, with a multi-million 
dollar special-effects budget you can put to use at the turn of a phrase. 

But there's a kind of magic that only happens when people work together. 
Collaboration kindles a kind of synergy that can result in something truly origi- 
nal. That's why writers like Clive Barker, who have achieved a great deal of 
success in print, are drawn to an inherently collaborative art form like film. 
Even if you know your work may be altered to suit a casting or location 
change, a director's wishes, or even an accountant's budget, it can be a genuine 
pleasure to be part of a group of creative minds, working together to achieve 
a common vision. 

There's a persistent myth that writing is the most solitary of activities. But 
that's not entirely true. One of the "trade secrets" of many successful writers is 
that they make a point of interacting with others, some by collaborating on 
projects with other writers, others by "workshopping" their writing with 
friends, family members, fellow writers, or a sympathetic editor. 

It's not just the enthusiasm and positive reinforcement that makes sharing 
your work with others worthwhile; it's what that give and take brings to the 
work itself. 

The heart of the writing process, or any artistic endeavor, lies in commu- 
nicating your own experiences as vividly and honestly as possible with others, 
so they can feel what you feel. The more friends you have around you to feed 
that experience with their own, the more believable your own work will be. 
And the more you understand how others think and feel, the more likely you 
are to touch another person's heart with your words. 

Tappan King 
Editor-in-Chief 



8 TWILIGHT ZONE 



LETTERS 


□ ACK IN 1985, 1 WAS GIVEN AN ISSUE 
of Twilight Zone Magazine as a 
present when I was laid up in a 
hospital after an operation. It 
was given to me since I'd always liked 
the series. I found your magazine had 
stories that were ideally suited for the 
short bursts of strength I had during my 
recovery. I loved the magazine, and 
soon took out my own subscription so 
I wouldn't miss an issue. Since then, I 
have read every issue from cover to 
cover. (My favorite story was "Dreams 
of Drowning," by Wells Lord Hough. I 
hope to see more of his worl* in your 
magazine.) Keep up the good work. 

Susan M. Skibba 
Milwaukee, WI 

I HAVE BEEN READING TWILIGHT ZONE FOR 
so long, I can't remember when I started. 
It is my favorite magazine, and the only 
one I've continued subscribing to since I 
went back to school for a "mid-life 
career change." 

You've run many wonderful stories 
that have continued to haunt me months 
— even years— after I've read them. I 
also love your book reviews, and I find 
your excerpts from novels just fantastic 
(I couldn't wait for Swan Song to come 
out after reading your preview.) 

The stories I care for least are the 
traditional ones where I know the pro- 
tagonist is going to endure some ter- 
rible fate in the end. 

But, by and large, I'm hooked. 
Keep 'em coming! 

Nancy Preston 
Lynwood, CA 

I THOUGHT I'D WRITE YOU A LETTER AND 
tell you what I felt about your maga- 
zine. First, I'll start with what I did like. 

I love the TZ scripts. They are very in- 
teresting, and I try to watch for the 
ones I've read to come on television; 
it's neat to see how they are done. I 
also love the non-fiction features you 
have. The film previews and articles 
on strange phenomena are consistently 
refreshing. 

The fantasy fiction stories are also 
a favorite of mine. But here comes the 


problem. The bulk of your fiction 
seems to be horror. I prefer the TZ 
"fantasy" stories that make you think— 
the ones that express an interesting 
idea — far more than the horror stories 
where some innocent victim suffers. I 
also never know whether a story will 
be horror or fantasy (maybe you could 
put them in different sections?). 

Karen Boyer 
Sterling, MA 

Thank you for resuming publication of 
Rod Serling's Twilight Zone teleplays in 
the magazine. I let my subscription lapse 
for a while, but now have renewed it. 

Serling's work helped fire and 
shape my imagination when I was grow- 
ing up — I suspect the same is true for a 
lot of us in our mid-forties — and I've 
been very pleased to see my children 
enjoying the Twilight Zone rebroadcasts. 

Thank you again for bring this 
original work back to life. 

Corey Phelps 
Des Moines, IA 

A WELL-INTENTIONED FRIEND OF MINE ASKED 
me the other day what TZ has that 
makes me buy it so faithfully. First, let 
me tell you what you don't have. You 
don't have the most information on the 
latest sci-fi megaturkeys. To be honest, 
the movie mags do that better, especial- 
ly since you dropped your color sec- 
tion. (Bring it back!) You don't have the 
goriest pictures. You don't even have 
the most short stories. (Other maga- 
zines give you more words of fiction 
for your dollar.) 

But the stories you do have get to 
me in ways others don't. ("Wolf Trap- 
ping" in the latest issue literally kept me 
up all night!) More important, you take 
my favorite kind of entertainment more 
seriously than anybody else does. 

Here's what I mean: Each time I 
finish an issue, I feel like I've had a 
great party with a bunch of really 
strange people who like me, and want to 
talk about things that they liked (or 
hated— that's just as good) with me. 
You guys really think about what you 
put into each issue (unlike some brain- 


dead publications I could name.) 

If I had one complaint (or request, 
rather), it would be that you do less 
about more things. I'd like your opinions 
on everything that's going on in fantasy 
and horror these days — movies, artwork, 
games, conventions. I'd also like to see 
short articles on the different kinds of 
fantasy out there. (It's easy to get lost.) 
But I guess that would take twice as 
many pages, and I can barely afford to 
buy each issue as it is! Never mind. 

Anyway, thanks for giving me 
something to look forward to. (Loved the 
"Drowning Man" cover, by the way!) 

Megan Cooper 
Lakeland, LA 


To MANY OF US WHO GREW UP WATCHING 
The Twilight Zone, and continue to 
watch it in endless reruns. Rod Serling 
has become something of a mythical 
figure. In "Return of the Zone" (Feb 89), 
J. Michael Straczynski casually drops 
the names of two "lost" Twilight Zone 
outlines by Rod Serling that will not be 
produced for the current series. Just 
reading the titles, "The Theatre" and 
"Osgood and the Warlock," is enough to 
make a Serling fan's mouth water, and 
mind wonder. 

Some of the new episodes have 
been disappointing, but overall TZ3 
looks promising. ("The Hellgrammite 
Method" would have made a great 
Night Gallery ). Mr. Straczynski's "in- 
sider's view" has made watching the 
show a much more enjoyable experi- 
ence for me. 

Timothy M. Walters 
Muskogee, OK 

We welcome letters on any subject of 
interest to our readers. All letters must 
contain your name and address and are 
assumed to be intended for publication, 
unless you request otherwise. Letters 
submitted become the property of the 
Publisher, and we reserve the right to 
edit them for length or suitability. Send let- 
ters to TZ LETTERS DEPARTMENT, 401 
Park Avenue South, New York, NY 
10016-8802. 


10 TWILIGHT ZONE 




BOOKS 

EDWARD BRYANT 

New Wave Horror, New Age Fiction— and Beyond 


□ live Barker is the very image 
of the sort of fellow who many 
writers would love to become. 
Aside from being young and 
British, he's a very successful novelist, 
short-story writer, graphic artist, play- 
wright, and film director with a global 
following. Articulate, intelligent, and 
witty, he also takes great bookjacket 
photographs. 

While he's perhaps best known (or 
perhaps most notorious) for the super- 
charged energy level and immoderate 
voice of his prose. Barker loves to inject 
gallows humor into his fiction. However 
grim the events of a given story, the au- 
thor defends his word-plays and manic 
images: "It's a very British way to look 
at the surface of literature. Look at 
practically any of the Jacobeans or the 
Elizabethan playwrights. The surface 
works. It's lively with all that kind of 
material. I think what it signals to the 
reader is: I care enough about the sur- 
face of this fiction to give you many 
kinds of pleasures." 

Below the Surface 

Some of those pleasures are terrible 
puns. In the title short novel of his new 
collection Cabal (Poseidon Press, 
$18.95, 377 pp„ ISBN 0-671-62688-4), a 
rather endearing character who hap- 
pens to be an undead ghoul is, at one 
point, disemboweled by the serial-killer 
villain of the piece. The dead man stands 
there, watching his guts spill out on the 
ground. "Help me," he cries out, "I'm 
coming undone." Perhaps that sort of 
thigh-slapping humor is not to every 
reader's taste, but to many of us it's a 
welcome note of grace in an otherwise 
violent, horrific scene. 

After his grim first novel. The Dam- 
nation Game, Barker claims that its 
successors, Weaveworld and Cabal, are 
meant to be optimistic and healing. 



Cabal does not, on the surface, seem 
that fruitful a vehicle for constructive 
optimism. 


It's about a psychiatric patient named 
Boone who is manipulated by his doc- 
tor into thinking that he (Boone) is 
completely looney tunes — is, in fact, a 
serial killer. Fleeing the malign shrink's 
setup, Boone seeks sanctuary in a vast 
necropolis located in a deserted town 
somewhere in northern Alberta. There 
he encounters the Nightbreed, a collec- 
tion of flesh-eating ghouls (though nice 
folks otherwise) living beneath the 
cemetery. One of them says, "Being 
dead isn't bad. It isn't even that differ- 
ent. It's just. . .unexpected." 

The unlucky protagonist ends up 
dead and reborn into monsterdom, as 
all the while his mortal lover continues 
attempting to recover him. The subter- 
ranean monsters find themselves menaced 
by a human monster far more malevo- 
lent than anything lurking in a cob- 
webbed tomb. The novel has its com- 
plement of violence, not to mention a 
genuinely askew sex/love scene, which 
the author says spins off of "a sort of 



S&M Christianity." 

And yes, there's a happy ending .... 
The novel does end up both healing 
and optimistic Granting certain condi- 
tions . . . Barker says there will be two 
more short novels in this series. Addi- 
tionally, he'll be writing and directing a 
big-screen production of Cabal for 
Morgan Creek Productions, the folks 
who brought you David Cronenberg's 
Dead Ringers. 

One of Barker's accomplishments 
in Cabal is to explore offbeat notions of 
death. He has a great intellectual inter- 
est in death, be it collecting famous last 
words (Oscar Wilde on his deathbed 
looking up at the wallpaper and saying, 
"Either the wallpaper goes or I go."), or 
admiring the visionary paintings of 
Stanley Spencer in the Tate. He recog- 
nizes the importance of the concept of 
death as something that can be explored 
through horror fiction. Just as Stephen 
King defines such vicarious experiences 
as roller-coaster rides and reading hor- 
ror novels, in Cabal, Barker rehearses us 
for death. 

While some of the heedless, head- 


12 TWILIGHT ZONE 





long pacing of early Barker is missing 
in Cabal, the novel profits from an in- 
creased and much more fluid maturity. 

Cabal is actually a mutated and 
much-augmented American version of 
the sixth and final volume of Barker's 
seminal work. The Books of Blood. 
The eponymous short novel is brand- 
new. The final framing vignette from 
the original edition has been dropped 
(it now appears in the handsome hard- 
back Putnam omnibus of the first three 
volumes, titled The Books of Blood). 
The four longer pieces of fiction from 
volume six have been retained. "The Life 
of Death," "How Spoilers Bleed," and 
"Twilight at the Towers" are here, along 
with the novella, "The Last Illusion." 
"The Last Illusion" is a marvelous piece 
about tough detective Harry d'Amour's 
run-in with the supernatural. It's the 
best chunk of hardboiled occult fiction 
since William Hjortsberg’s Falling Angel. 

All in all. Cabal is a remarkably 
satisfying book; certainly one of the 
best horror collections of the year. 

Jack in the Box 

Here's another fascinating collection. 
It's not marketed or packaged as a col- 
lection. No one concerned would ever 
admit it's a collection. Let's just avoid 
strife and refer to it as a "novel." Sort of 
a novel. Whatever it is. Dead Lines (Ban- 
tam, $3.95, 309 pp„ ISBN 0-553- 
27633-6) is certainly the tightest and 
best-written of the five collaborative 
books thus far published by John Skipp 
and Craig Spector. Dead Lines concerns 
Jack Rowan, a nightmarish twit of a 
New York writer, all twisted ego and 
jerk-off sensibilities. Jack hangs himself 
in his best friend's loft; then deeply 
regrets his impetuous act. He wants to 
come back. A lot, In the meantime, the 
loft has been rented by Meryl and Katie, 
two tough, vulnerable, with-it Man- 
hattan young women. Katie once was 
Jack's lover, but doesn't know her new 
abode is where he offed himself. Meryl 
finds and reads a secret stash box filled 
with manuscripts— Jack's unpublished 
stories. We get to read the stories, too. 
Thus the aspect of Dead Lines that 
cleverly makes it a collection. Tenant 
rights in Midtown not being everything 
they could be. Jack gets the opportuni- 
ty to attempt a little repossession — of 
Katie's body. 

Jack Rowan isn't all that bad a 
writer. A number of his stories have 
been published separately under the 
Skipp and Spector bylines, jointly and 
separately. Clearly Harlan Ellison is at 
least one of Rowan's important influ- 
ences. The quality of Rowan's prose 
ranges from so-so to pretty damned 


good. For example, "Gentlemen" (from 
The Architecture of Fear) is a flat-out 
fine story. 

Where Skipp and Spector fall short 
of writing an unreserved tour de force 
is in the integration (or lack thereof) of 
Jack Rowan's fiction and the lives of the 
characters. Some of the stories within 
the greater story don't seem to have 
any great reason for being there, other 
than to bulk out the central conceit. 
Skipp and Spector needed to play more 
with the blurring of fantasy and reality, 
life and fiction, fabrication and truth, 
paying more attention to all the ragged 
areas where people's internal stories are 
seamless with their external existences. 

But, in any case, it's good to see the 
graph of the Skipp and Spector 's career 
continue to climb at escape velocity. 

New Age Fiction 

Like a blind, snuffling predator, the 
great New York publishing beast senses 
that there's a vast untapped consumer 
market out there for an enormous spec- 
trum of books that can somehow be 
tagged''New Age." No one’s quite sure 
what belongs on the New Age aisle in 
Waldenbooks or B. Dalton's, but there's 


money to be made regardless. Nonfic- 
tion's been one kettle of eels. Fiction is 
another. Do New Age people read fic- 
tion other than Jacob Atabet, Olaf 
Stapledon, and Walden 111 Yes, proba- 
bly. For years now, there have been 
signs that various trade publishers would 
start up slickly packaged lines of New 
Age fiction. So far, it hasn't happened. 
It will. The marketplace will dictate it. 
But the publishers paradoxically have 
been resisting mightily. They just seem 
very unsure of how to sell novels that 
drop the fantasy label, yet still deal 
with communication with alien and/or 
dead entities, dolphin wisdom, crystals 
of power, revelations from Atlantis, 
and personal transformation to the nth 
power. 

According to a highly placed source 
at Simon & Schuster, Pocket Books al- 
most inaugurated a New Age fiction 
line late last year. The debut offering was 
to be a first novel by Devin O'Branagan 
called Spirit Warriors ($4.50, 360 pp., 
ISBN 0-671-66774-2). The book appeared, 
but was labeled horror. A failure of 
nerve, apparently. The sales force wasn't 
quite sure what New Age fiction was, 
and how it could be sold in Dubuque. 



“Jeter's 
writing is 

impressive, 
intense, vivid, 
and unflinch- 
ingly honest.” 

-RAMSEY CAMPBELL 

“IN THE LAND 
OF THE DEAD is 

so powerful, it’s 
numbing. Jeter’s 
prose is lean as 
a scalpel and 
cuts to the bone.” 

-J0ELANSDALE 

IN THE LAND 
OF THE DEAD 
By K.W. Jeter 

$3 95 @ ONYX 


TWILIGHT ZONE 13 



ft 

BOOKS 


And, indeed. I'm not sure I can de- 
fine it, either. It would be too easy to 
toss off New Age fiction as simply the 
same old wine in new plastic cartons. 
It's tempting to pick on the vocabulary. 
(Before an operation, one character says 
to another in Spirit Warriors, "Can you 
leave your body, or do you want seda- 
tion?") But that's not all of it, by any 
means. What I take New Age work to 
be attempting, by and large, is an in- 
tegration of omni-cultural systems of 
metaphysics, along with an emphasis 
on personal, often radical, transforma- 
tion. New Age thought seems to be 
very open. Also very credulous. 

Spirit Warriors starts in 1962 with 
both the Antichrist and the Daughter of 
God being reborn into the world at the 
proper conjunction of planets. An age- 
old play has begun again. We meet other 
players who must make up their own 
minds about which side they'll support: 
Fay, the Gypsy psychic; Neva, the Native 
American medicine woman; Eric, the 
self-sufficient Vietnam vet. 

As a novice effort, the novel's pret- 
ty good, though it rapidly becomes ap- 
parent that the writer's bitten off about 
three thousand pages worth of material 
and tried to compress it into a space one 
tenth that. All the necessary writer's 
skills are in abundant evidence, al- 
though not yet fully tuned and polished. 
Author O'Branagan gets a ten for ambi- 
tion, perhaps a six or seven for execution. 
As with so many other contemporary 
fantasists, she has trouble striking the 
proper balance of focus with her rotat- 
ing cast of characters. Part of Stephen 
King's magic is his ability to set down 
just the right qualities and precise detail 
that will satisfactorily sketch the por- 
trait of a character with economy. Most 



of his competition either includes too 
much or too little — or simply the wrong 
details altogether. 

With O'Branagan, there are wonder- 
ful backgrounds, particularly with her 
Native American characters. All the de- 
tail of ritual and ceremony ring very 
true. The plot -well, it's as tested and 
true as the cast-engine block in a 1964 
Rambler. The level of writing is good, 
every once in a while breaking into the 
kind of evocative prose that communi- 
cates far more than what the bare words 
actually say on the printed page. 

My qualm? That matter of focus 
again. I felt far too infrequently that 1 
was actually walking inside the skins of 
the characters. Distance. Perhaps that's 
the key. So many characters, so many 
plotlines. It was hard to close the dis- 
tance between printed page and human 
heart. 

Yet .... And yet. Unlike most other 
books I read. Spirit Warriors insinuat- 
ed itself into my dreams after I finished 
the final chapters. That probably says 
something. At the very least, it says 
that I'll go out of my way to give Devin 
O'Branagan's second novel a try. 

Son of Slob 

The indefatigable Rex Miller has pub- 
lished his second novel, a follow-up to 
last year's Slob. The new one's called 
Frenzy (Onyx, $3.95, 302 pp., ISBN 0- 
451-40105-0). It's another Jack Eichord 
novel, at least nominally about a disaf- 
fected Chicago homicide detective. But 
just as Slob focused on its eponymous 
five-hundred pound maniacal serial 
killer, so Frenzy centers on another psy- 
chopath. Frank Spain is the St. Louis 
mob's chief hitman. Unfortunately, be- 
ing on the road all the time takes a toll 
on Spain's homelife. His wife runs off 
with another man; his alienated teenage 
daughter takes up with a sleazoid punk. 
The boyfriend then inducts the girl into 
the mysteries of sex, drugs, prostitu- 
tion, and — ultimately— a downward spi- 
ral of degradation that ends when the 
girl stars in a Mexican snuff movie. 
Eventually, her father finds all this out 
and compiles a list of everyone respon- 
sible. He is not happy. The psycho with 
a career is now a psycho with a cru- 
sade. Spain finds out that the ultimate 
evil behind his daughter's death is the 
very Mafia family he works for. A true 
gonzo berserker, he starts slicing, dicing, 
chopping, and flaying through the long 
list of those who laid one perverted, 
sadistic finger on his beloved only child. 

The detective. Jack Eichord, comes 
into the case when he's investigating 
some of Spain's "professional" depreda- 



tions. But he ultimately has even less to 
do in this novel than in Slob. Clearly, 
the focus of auctorial interest is on the 
maniac with a mission. 

Frenzy is not a particularly affecting 
fantasy of revenge. Nothing Shakespear- 
ian here. The novel is more a whipped 
confection with a metallic, somewhat 
bitter undertaste. Imagine a mutant 
eclair with razor blades and rusty nails 
inserted into the cream filling. 

One thing Miller's novels have done 
is to create considerable speculation 
about their authorship. That the style 
of each book careens wildly among 
points of view, tense changes, and tonal 
sea changes has led to speculation that 
Rex Miller is either a very strange dude 
— or he's a pseudonym for a whole 
group of writers. For a while there was 
reason for me to believe "Miller" was a 
literary committee, much like the News- 
day staff who jointly concocted Naked 
Came the Stranger by "Penelope Ashe." 
Now I know I was wrong, but it was a 
great story while it lasted. 

I had a wonderfully esoteric liter- 
ary theory precariously balanced on 
the observation that Frenzy's plot and 
entire sensibility contain striking paral- 
lels to Barry Malzberg's old Lone Wolf 
series, written as Mike Barry. Could it 
be that Malzberg was yet another po- 
tential lobe of Rex Miller's brain? 

Nope, as it turned out. And you 
all will have at least another three Jack 
Eichord adventures to look forward to, 
including a visit from an old friend. 
Then, somewhere in Miller's publishing 
schedule, there will be a killer of a seri- 
ous Vietnam novel called The Profane 
Men. So stay tuned. 


14 TWILIGHT ZONE 




Short Takes 

It's time to support your local Lansdale 
again. In return. Uncle Joe will tell you 
a bedtime story to curdle your spinal 
fluid. New is Cold in July (Bantam, 
$3.50, 208 pp., ISBN 0-553-28020-1) by 
Joe R. Lansdale. You'll probably find 
this one stashed over in the mystery/ 
suspense section. It's about a nice guy 
with a wife and young son who, one 
night after shooting an intruder, is 
plunged into nightmare. Reality keeps 
flip-flopping like a winter flu virus 
mutating. The novel's a kicker about 
parental responsibility, in which females 
possess the only sensible moral com- 
pass. But that doesn't stop boys from 
doin' what boys gotta do. Spare and 
uncompromising. Cold in July echoes 
all sorts of tall, rangy writers of the 
Forties and Fifties, but still ends up. its 
own thing. Joe Bob, er, Ed says, "Check 
it out." 

There's a tough new kid in town, 
and when he — and sometimes it's she — 
talks, you'd better listen. What I'm 
making reference to is Pulphouse (Pulp- 
house Publishing, Box 1227, Eugene, OR 
97440, $17.95, 267 pp.) edited by Kristine 
Rusch and published by Dean Wesley 
Smith. Pulphouse is nominally a quar- 


terly periodical; in fact, it refers to it- 
self as "the hardback magazine." But 
when something howls like a jaguar, 
pads like a jaguar, and has spots like a 
jaguar, chances are that when it leaps 
on you from a tree, you're dead meat. 
So let's say that Pulphouse is a lot like 
a four-times-a-year original anthology. 
This first volume is a state-of-the-art 
example of desktop publishing done 
well. The production values and design 
are executed marvelously. The format 
for issue one is one thousand copies of 
a sewn-binding hardback and two hun- 
dred-fifty copies bound in leather, slip- 
cased, and signed by all contributors. 
Both editions are handsome. 

The plan for Pulphouse is to rotate 
the editorial focus over the course of a 
year from horror (issue one) to specula- 
tive fiction, fantasy, and science fiction. 
The contents of the first horror number 
are tremendously eclectic and largely suc- 
cessful. There is a healthy mix of new 
and familiar bylines. The excitement 
and energy levels are high. A few of the 
stories come across as the sort one oc- 
casionally stereotypes as Clarion Work- 
shop exercises — ambitious but arid. But 
the rest carve out new territory. Michael 
Bishop's 'A Father's Secret" is a nasty. 


nasty examination of child abuse. Kij 
Johnson's "Ferata" takes an M TV-paced 
ride through vampirism and revenge 
fantasies — if the word weren't so dumb, 
"vampunk" might be appropriate. "The 
Soft Whisper of Midnight Snow" by 
Charles de Lint is a quietly paced tale of 
enormous ascending power as an artist 
learns the true nature of her work. 
Harlan Ellison contributes a brand-new 
hard-nosed romance about a guy who 
falls hopelessly and helplessly in love 
with the wrong woman. "Public Places" 
by J. N. Williamson casts a remarkably 
unblinking eye on a very bad man be- 
set by occult forces in a dingy men's 
room. It's a track-stopper. Such writers 
as Kate Wilhelm, Ron Goulart, William 
F. Wu, and Steve Rasnic Tern contribute 
another sixteen stories. Additionally, 
there's nonfiction, including Jack Wil- 
liamson's pair of mini-essays about 
style and tone, Kim Antieau examining 
the nature of horror, and Jon Gustafson 
writing about horror art. A lungful of 
crisp autumn air in an increasingly stuffy 
field, Pulphouse should be supported. 

Another anthology well worth buy- 
ing and reading is Tim Sullivan's Tropi- 
cal Chills (Avon, $3.95, 258 pp., ISBN 

CONTINUED ON PAGE 94 


Dance a Cemetery Dance with Joe R 
Lansdale, Richard Christian Matheson, Thomas F. 
Monteleone, William ReUingJr., David B. Silva, and 
Steve Rasnic Tern . . . 

If you like Twilight Zone, you'll love Cemetery Dance, 
featuring unique tales of dark fantasy by today's top best-sellers, 
plus the best of the young "splatter punks." Each issue is jam- 
packed with fiction, interviews, news and reviews, like our debut 
issue, in which you'll meet David B. Silva, editor of The Horror 
Show and author of Come Thirteen, up close and personal in a 
brand new interview. Then, read "Fury's Child," Silva's latest 
chilling masterpiece. Plus, there's Steve Rasnic Tern's "The 
Double," Bentley Little's "The Janitor," and 9 more modern clas- 
sics of the supernatural! Place your order today because they're 
going fast, and they're sure to become collector's items! 

But wait, there's more! After you've devoured our debut 
issue, you'll want to watch your mailbox for our special All-Pro 
Issue, featuring 8 new stories by your favorite best-selling au- 
thors! All this, and you'll also receive a free issue of Nb News, the 
official New blood Magazine subscriber newsletter, when you 
subscribe to Cemetery Dance. 

Cemetery Dance, P.O. Box 189, Riverdale, MD 20737 - Please make check or m.o. payable to Richard Chizmar only 

I want to subscribe to CD for;- 

□ One Year - 3 Issues - Only $11.00 □ Two Years - 6 Issues - Only $20.00 □ A Single Issue - $4.00 

Name 

Address City State Zip 



♦ 


TWILIGHT ZONE 15 





1988 PARAMOUNT PICTURES CORP 


SCREEN 

GAHAN WILSON 

The Ghosts of Christmas Past 


hristmastime was just a little 
brighter and jollier for us last 
year, since one of the season's 
big moneymakers, Scrooged 
(Paramount), came from our special 
area of the macabre-fantastic That 
kind of success is always nice to see 
(even if, sometimes, the particular block- 
buster isn't) because it means that 
Hollywood's Men in Suits (who like 
nothing better than a successful prece- 
dent) will be encouraged to loosen up 
with the cash flow a little for new films 
in the same genre. I'll bet you as much 
as five dollars that even as I write this, 
and even as you read it (which is an 
odd but true sort of simultaneity, when 
you come to think on it), there are at 
least a dozen new Christmas fantasy 
films in various stages of production, 
and that as many as four of them will 
be released for our edification in the 


next Yuletide season. So you'd better 
watch out. 

Carol for Another Christmas 

Scrooged is decidedly uneven, but at its 
high points it has a fine, raunchy per- 
versity that definitely added to my holi- 
day cheer. The script, by Mitch Glazer 
and Michael O'Donoghue, gets in some 
nice nasty digs at various worthy tar- 
gets, and Richard Donner's direction is 
generally unabashed, free-wheeling, 
and suited to the outrageous situations 
and visions he's been given to present. 

The basic intent of the film is to 
relocate Dickens's beloved sentimental 
masterpiece to our present era. The no- 
tion is such an apt one that if you take 
the time to pause and give it the honest 
eye-to-eye examination it deserves, I 
think you'll find it will startle the hell 
out of you and set you off along ex- 




lAAiNb i rip: ScroogecT s Bill Murray rides into his checkered present witl 
cabbie David Johansen. 


tremely illuminating lines of thought. I 
know it did that for me. 

We have, in our time, accomplished 
a kind of sociological miracle that I, as 
a babe, essentially indoctrinated and 
shaped by the fearless Roosevelt, and as 
a grown man set further in those ways 
by the boldly visionary Kennedy, 
would have thought impossible. 

Thanks to the extraordinary com- 
bination of Reaganism and AIDS, we 
have successfully managed a return to 
the essential tenets of the Victorian era, 
to its morbid repressions and universal 
cruelties. (The total out-of-the-blueness 
of things certainly does make a mock- 
ery of the possibility of accurate 
prediction, does it not?) Some of us 
hope we have allowed ourselves to be 
dragged kicking and screaming only a 
little way back — but others appear to 
be delighted with the turn of events and 
have dived with wholehearted enthusi- 
asm into this return to the past. 

All of it has, interestingly, produced 
a much more colorful society. Once 
again we have flocks of entertainingly 
bizarre beggars in our streets (together 
with their attendant workhouses). 
Once again we have the flamboyant, 
desperately dramatic (and totally out of 
control) street criminals to prey on us 
and give us diverting tabloid reading, 
just as Jack the Ripper did. (And we 
also have a return of the obscene pri- 
sons of those times.) Worst of all, we 
once again feel free to scorn and ignore 
the sufferings of everyone who is not in 
our special group, and we can even find 
it in our hearts to blame them for their 
misery. I have done it myself. I shall 
probably do it again. 

Perhaps the greatest personal reve- 
lation I gleaned from Scrooged is that I 
have all this time been laboring under 
the naive notion that social progress 
was a fact, not a belief. I thought it was 
some final state that had been achieved 
and, thanks to such visionaries as 


16 TWILIGHT ZONE 


Roosevelt and Kennedy, we would have 
it always. It was something accom- 
plished, something done. Now I know 
better, but it took the collapse of a 
world to teach me. Dickens would feel 
quite at home in (and doubtless be just 
as pissed off with) this new/old society 
of ours. 

Okay, so all that aside, the initial 
challenge the creators of Scrooged set 
themselves was to figure out a contem- 
porary vocation loathesome enough to 
be appropriate to the title character. 
What occupation in today's society 
would be sufficiently vile, base, and 
dishonorable to provide enough scope 
for the misdeeds of anyone as actively 
villainous as Scrooge7 Of course! A 
network television president! And what 
would be his main preoccupation when 
we come upon him (aside from destroy- 
ing anyone or anything that might get 
in the way of bigger ratings and/or the 
advancement of his career)? Why, to 
produce a Christmas television special, 
to be sure! 

Bill Murray plays the modern ver- 
sion of Dickens's antihero with dedicat- 
ed, dead-eyed enthusiasm. His Scrooge 
is all executive ambition, all executive 
paranoia; hip-deep in constant, merci- 
less calculations. You can almost see 
the moral blinders flopping on the sides 
of his head. 

And his Chirstmas special — ah, 
what a special it is! Everything you've 
come to dread in such a production is 
here: all the terrible casting, all the 
hideous, life-draining cliches, all the 
beastliness and cruddiness and total 
dumbness you've come to expect in such 
a special. But there are little surprise 
touches: A confused-looking Buddy 
Hackett cast as Scrooge. An irascible 
John Houseman cast as the friendly, 
wise old reader declaiming sonorously 
from the big red Christmassy book on 
his lap. There are also the obligatory 
leggy Las Vegas dancers as carolers, 
and all sorts of other stuff to take the 
television viewers further and further 
away from the loving spirit of the sea- 
son and into peevish crankiness as they 
watch. 

Of course the essential conflict of 
the original A Christmas Carol was the 
constant moral contest going on between 
Scrooge and the Christmas Spirits. They 
did not hesitate to show the old repro- 
bate terrifying visions; they never con- 
cealed their disapproval of his selfish 
ways, but the underlying flavor of their 
arguments was one of reasoned, almost 
gentle persuasion. In Scrooged, on the 
other hand, the Spirits take their gloves 
entirely off, escalating the combative- 

CONTINUED ON PAGE 92 



SUGAR PLUM SCAREY: Delightfully dangerous Christmas sprite Carol Kane 
gets laughs while going for the eyes. 



DEAD MEN DO WEAR ARGYLE: Murray’s decidedly decomposing partner 
(John Forsythe) needs a good stiff drink. 


TWILIGHT ZONE 17 


1988 PARAMOUNT PICTURES CORP 


ILLUSTRATIONS BY PETER R. EMSHWILLER 


THE MIND’S 



A Special Report 
on the Audio Fiction Experience 

ou walk into a bookstore feverishly searching for the new book by 
your favorite author, say Stephen King or Arthur C. Clarke. You run 
to the bestseller rack and -Oh, no! It isn't there! You'll have to wait 
another week, you think, wishing these publishers would get on the 
ball. But then something on a nearby rack catches your eye. 

It has the author's name on it, along with the title you heard 
about. But it isn't a book. It's a couple of audio cassettes in a box. You pause. 
You're used to savoring this writer's words in print. How will it feel to hear 
him read the stuff? You're not sure, but man-oh-man you need those cassettes 
because you've loved everything he's ever written. You buy the tapes. And you 
listen. And you realize this audio thing is very different from reading a book. 

Of course there isn't anything all that new about hearing fiction read 
aloud. Your parents probably read you bedtime stories, or maybe as a kid you 
told your friends ghost stories. Maybe you've even heard "The Shadow" or 
some of the other great old radio plays. But now that a lot of people can afford 
personal stereos, more and more publishers are hoping you will want to hear a 
piece of fiction as much as you want to read it. 

Several publishers are producing more audio tapes than they ever have 
before -not just for folks who have trouble reading, but for all of us who like 
stories. This means that audio fiction is changing and growing. It is moving 
away from the utilitarian and becoming its own art form. 

We thought it was about time we gave you our view of this developing medium 
by offering you a selection of what's available on tape, as well as presenting 
you with an intimate taste of our personal experiences. We want you to know 
how it feels to hear a great horror or science fiction story on audio. 

So come with us now into an alternate dimension of sound, where the 
doorway to the imagination is the mind's ear. . . . 



18 TWILIGHT ZONE 




TERROR 
IN THE 
DARK 

What happens when you 
close your eyes...? 

by Jillian Smith 


HERE ARE YOU, ALONE IN THIS DARK 
place without landmarks, with- 
out the safety of visual cues? 
And what is that noise, that 
approaching sound? What is waiting 
out there to touch you? 

I would like to take you on a trip, 
a trip into horror. First, well look for it 
in a place you've found it before — inside 
the flickering dimness of a movie theater. 
Then, well go into the deeper darkness 
you can only find with the mind's ear. I 
think youll discover something about 
yourself there; something you may 
have suspected, but never admitted. 

So come with me. Sit down, relax, 
and don't resist. 

The Viewing Experience 

Your eyes are open, wide open, as you 
sit in the theater absorbing the images 
flashing in front of you. People are be- 
ing killed. You become uneasy as you 
witness their deaths, but you never see 
the killer. She is going to die, that 
woman on the screen; you do not 
know when, but you sense it's coming 
soon. You watch the fear on her face, 
her mouth moist and wantonly gaping, 
a mouth that moments ago was dressed 
in the most composed smile. Oh, God, 
it's coming. You can feel it. Yes, there it 



is, the killer! 

No, wait! That latex, rigid thing 
edged in neon blue can't be the fear- 
some creature that's been ravaging doz- 
ens of people. It's all wrong. As you 
watch, your fear evaporates, while the 
woman on the screen, the woman whose 
fear you shared, continues to squirm 
and gape and look ridiculous. Suddenly 
you're wishing it would kill her and get 
it over with; she's making a fool of 
herself. 

The horror experience has failed. 
The story is over and the house lights 
creep on; people are leaving and you 
have readjusted completely to yourself. 
Maybe if they had let you make the 
film, (close your eyes) the image of the 
killer would have been unbearable; the 
audience would have gone mad. But 
no. There would always be something 
missing. If you can see something in 
sharp, brilliant focus; if you know what 
it is, how much can it really scare you? 
The movie screen doesn't leave enough 
room for the creatures of your imagi- 
nation to writhe. So follow me again. 
Into the dark. 





A 

HIS DARK POWERFUL 
IMAGINATION - 
ND HIS SKILL MAKE 
THE HORROR GRISLY 
AND EFFECTIVE' 
PENTHOUSE 




TH 

I 


READ BY THE AUTHOR. 




BESTSELLING AUTHOR 
OF WEAVE WOR LD 


The Listening Experience 

Close your eyes. 

It's just you, alone, in the dark- 


TWILIGHT ZONE 19 



TERROR 



ness. Your mind is the screen and your 
imagination is the projectionist. Here 
no one can tell you what to see. No 
one can stop you from creating. You 
can't even stop yourself. (Slip in the 
tape. Dare to press the button.) A few 
bars of music begin to play, preparing 
you for the voyage, easing you in slow- 
ly, gently. The story begins. (Keep your 
eyes closed.) 

At first you're feeling removed, as 
if it's not your story, your experience. 
You wait to be swept along, passive and 
powerless, just like when you were in 
the movie theater. Soon enough, though, 
it begins: Sounds and voices flash im- 
ages on the screen in your mind. There's 


After listening to the audio horror 
tapes night upon night, in the rare quiet 
of the city, the darkness of early morn- 
ing, I've noticed my manner has changed. 
I've become more nervous than usual. 
When I finished listening to one of the 
tapes, I would sit for a few minutes try- 
ing to regain my balance, trying to shake 
the horror from my mind. I searched 
for that period of readjustment that 
comes so easily after a movie ends. I 
wanted the credits to roll, to reassure 
me that the people were only actors, as 
I recalled my place in society, my name. 
It didn't happen. No credits, no reassur- 
ance. I was like a child, repeating over 
and over, "It was only a story." It was 


you will feel quietly unsettled. The calm 
way in which the voice tells tales of 
twisted minds -the sort that delight in 
murder and mutilation — is seriously dis- 
turbing. That unique blend of terror 
and class has made Poe the master of 
eloquent horror. 

Poe is not the only sophisticate 
available on audio cassette. You can 
sample Bram Stoker's Dracula, Robert 
Louis Stevenson's The Strange Case of 
Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde, Ambrose 
Bierce's The Damned Thing, or W.W. 
Jacobs's The Monkey's Paw. The Mon- 
key's Paw is a story that dug its claws 
deep into my imagination when I was 
young. As a matter of fact, it was first 



one character you're particularly identi- 
fying with. S/he even resembles you. 

The two of you are both feeling 
fear; sweat is slowly crawling down 
your face. What is it you are afraid of? 
(The tape plays on.) What character 
have you become in your imagination? 
You must be the one cowering in the 
darkness, in the false security of the 
corner. (You can stop the tape if you 
want, but you won't.) Trembling, you 
wait, one with the victim, for what you 
knew all along was going to happen. 

But something is already happen- 
ing to you, here in the dark. You are 
not the victim, are you? That expres- 
sion on your face is not the fright of an 
innocent person. No, you have become 
something you never dreamed. You are 
the killer. An unspeakable passion oozes 
through you. You have allowed it to 
spill through your body, because you 
are alone, because it's dark. 

All you wanted was a little taste, 
just a taste of the other side of fear. 
Sleeping in you all this time was this 
desire, and no one knew. You never 
knew, until you were left alone with the 
blackness. Now you know the secret. 
No one needs to show you what horror 
looks like; you are the horror. 

Warning: These tapes May 
Cause Some Minor Side Effects 

You see what I'm saying. The new wave 
of audio horror has rediscovered a se- 
cret that the radio age knew all too 
well. Terror that comes in the dark isn't 
safe. It creeps up from deep inside you, 
uses your own imagination to make itself 
real. 


as if the tape wasn't over, as if it con- 
tinued to play in some mechanism im- 
planted in my head. 

At first I thought it couldn't be the 
tapes, yet I find I spend my days in ap- 
prehension and my nights in a struggle 
to sleep. I see every color of the night 
sky as it changes by the hour, until fi- 
nally it becomes light and I can admit 
that sleep has escaped me once again. 

I'm hoping it will wear away with 
time. I'm hoping I can convince myself 
it wasn't me; I wasn't the one on the 
tape. But it hasn't happened yet. A part 
of me is still there, with the horror, lost 
in the heart of the darkness. 

Truly Disturbing Horror 

If you want to join me here in the dark, 
it's easy to begin. There's a large selec- 
tion of truly disturbing horror available 
on tape these days, so you should have 
no problem finding a starting point. 

The stories are presented in two 
basic ways: narration and dramatiza- 
tion. Narration is like a bedtime story, 
with one person reading all parts of the 
tale. Dramatization, like a play, has 
only dialogue, with different actors play- 
ing each part. 

For sheer, classic terror, there's no 
better place to start than Edgar Allan 
Poe. Plenty of Poe can be found on au- 
dio cassette from a variety of distribu- 
ters. Poe sounds wonderful when he's 
read aloud, most often by a single, dis- 
tinguished male voice. You will find the 
readings create a sense of isolation that 
allows your imagination to romp around 
and create as much as it wants. As that 
stately, theatrical voice tells the tale. 


told to me as a ghost story. I've never 
read it and I've never forgotten it. 

For those of you who are new to 
it, it's a tale of a couple who get their 
hands on a trinket with the power to 
grant three wishes. Devastated by the 
death of their son, the couple ask an un- 
speakable favor of the paw, and in 
turn, receive an unspeakable result. 
Without resorting to graphic gore, The 
Monkey's Paw works on your imagina- 
tion, making you conjure the horror on 
the other side of the door. It is the sort 
of tale that can haunt you for years. 

Books on Tape offers an unedited 
version of Mary Shelley's classic 
Frankenstein, and Spoken Arts, an 
abridged one. I listened to the Spoken 
Arts version and was completely enve- 
loped as actors read the parts of those 
unforgettable characters. Since I am so 
fond of the novel, I expected to be dis- 
appointed in the reading, but I loved 
every minute of this classic story of a 
scientist who dares to play God by 
creating a man out of spare parts. I 
strongly recommend this tape, especial- 
ly to those who have never read the 
novel; it is a far stranger story than the 
one you know from the movies. 

More recent "classics" can be found 
on tape, too. Robert Bloch's Psycho is 
available from Listening Library. The 
short novel that Hitchcock interpreted 
so well is stunning in its original form. 
Certainly, Janet Leigh will flash through 
your mind when the infamous shower 
scene plays. But I should warn you, 
there are a few things about Norman 
Bates that Hitchcock didn't show us ... . 

George Romero's Night of the Liv- 


CONTINUED ON PAGE 95 


20 TWILIGHT ZONE 



SKIFFY 
ON THE 
SUBWAY 

Listening to the Music 
of the Spheres — 

by Margaret Mayo 
McGlynn 


L ike horror audio, sf on tape 
can take you into another di- 
mension of sound. But horror 
fiction draws you into a disturb- 
ing universe. Science fiction, or sci-fi, 
or "skiffy" (a term used by sf hipsters) 
— even at its most dystopian — tends to 
act like a spaceship or time machine, 
flying you away from the uncomforta- 
ble aspects of everyday life. 

As a kid, I relished sf's out-of-real- 
ity experience. I used to shut the door 
of my bedroom, flop down on my four- 
poster bed, open a book and jump glee- 
fully into a different world. In later 
years, I realized that science fiction had 
not merely offered me a momentary 
escape from a not-so-blissful childhood. 
It had taught me to see life in a new 
way— a way analogous to when an art- 
ist steps back from a painting to get a 
better sense of the whole composition. 
When I began listening to some of my 
favorite stories on tape, I was hoping 
audio as a medium would be able to 
preserve — and perhaps even enhance— 
all of science fiction's unique qualities. 

As I pulled out my headphones 
and tape player for my first listen to an 
sf story, I wondered why the genre need- 
ed to be translated into audio. Shouldn't 
reading the words on the page be enough? 
But I plunged into the tapes, summon- 


ing up my critical faculties. 

When I criticize anything, I am of 
two minds— or personas. The first is 
the slightly curmudgeonly aesthetic 
purist I learned to be sometime in high 
school. The second is the media mani- 
ac, the TV generation kid— about twelve 
years old, crying towel in hand, eyes 
perpetually glued to some kind of glow- 
ing screen, scarfing down popcorn by the 
bucket. These two tend to have little 
family squabbles inside my head, but 
sometimes they agree. And I trust both 
of them to help me make judgments. 

I usually listened to the audio tapes 
while riding the R train from Manhat- 
tan to my apartment in Queens. Both 
sides of me love music, and I've found 
my headphones do a good job of trans- 
porting my mind away from that evil 
underground. Reading science fiction is 
also a good ticket out of those screech- 
ing grottoes of hell. Therefore I figured 
that a "subway stress test" would work 
for science fiction on audio. After listen- 
ing to a batch of tapes while shunting 
back and forth from Queens, I realized 
the environment gave the TV kid in my 
head the upper hand on a number of 
occasions. When I get cranky, she's at 
the peak of her power. (And who 
doesn't get cranky down there?) But 
even the pickiest intellectual purist will 
CONTINUED ON PAGE 95 

TWILIGHT ZONE 21 




"TEAM TZ": 
Story 
Editor Joe 
Straczynski; 
Casting 
Director 
Mary Ann 
Barton; and 
Executive 
Producer 
Marc 
Shelmerdine. 



22 TWILIGHT ZONE 


RETURN OF 
THE ZONE 


PART FIVE 


First, the news. 

The very last installment of the new, syndicated Twilight 
Zone, Harlan Ellison's "Crazy as a Soup Sandwich," entered 
production on December 12, 1988, one year, two months, 
and eleven days after I was first hired to story-edit the show. 

We had wanted to end production with our least complicated 
episodes. But, naturally, we finished with the most complex. 
"Soup" required over one hundred camera setups (nearly 
thirty percent over the average), and the most elaborate ef- 
fects of any of the episodes. 

(Harlan is still astonished by this. “It's just a simple little 
story" he said to me the other day. I think I will have that 
engraved on my headstone.) 

"Soup" is directed by Paul Lynch, and stars Anthony 
Fransciosa in the role of Nino Ventura, a suave underworld 
type who has an unusual encounter with someone who hails 
from an even deeper Underworld. Final casting announce- 
ments have also been made for the other shows which have 
been completed. Janet Leigh stars in "Rendezvous in a Dark 
Place," a story about a lonely woman's flirtation with death, 
and what happens when she's rejected even by him, written 
by J. Michael Straczynski, and directed by Rene Bonniere. 
Pamela Bellwood stars in "Cat and Mouse," a story about an 
oversexed werecat with one of the nastiest, sharpest endings 
I've ever seen, written by Christy Marx, and directed by Eric 
Till. David Naughton (of An American Werewolf in London) 
stars in "Special Service," a comic episode about paranoia 
that asks the question, "What do you do when you find out 
they really are watching you?" written by J. Michael Strac- 
zynski, and directed by Randy Bradshaw. Ben Murphy plays 
the lead in "Love is Blind," about one man’s decision to kill his 
wife, and the outside interference that affects his plan, writ- 
ten by Cal Willingham and directed by Gilbert Shilton. 

There's one other piece of news that has been withheld 
up until now, and this notice in Twilight Zone Magazine 
marks the first time any mention has been made of it, 
anywhere. 

One afternoon, a package arrived at the TZ3 offices 
from a source that must remain, for the time being, unidenti- 
fied. I had been told to expect the package, but to keep its 
existence secret until its contents had been examined, and a 
determination had been made as to their disposition. 

What I discovered within were four unproduced scripts 
left over from the original Twilight Zone. There was "Pattern 
for Doomsday" and "Who Am 17," both ghost-written by Jerry 
Sohl for Charles Beaumont (the note on both cover pages, 
signed by Sohl, reads, "Written by Jerry Sohl for Charles 
Beaumont in an agreement centered on his increasing diffi- 
culties in writing because of Alzheimer's disease, which he 
did not then know he had; the work was done to aid Chuck 
and his family.") 

Then there was "What the Devil!" by Arch Oboler, dated ^ 


In Which the Author 
Speculates on 
Things Long Hidden 
(Whether They Wanted 
to Be or Not) 

article by 

J. Michael Straczynski 

Copyright © 1989, Synthetic Worlds, Ltd. 

PHOTOS BY J. MICHAEL STRACZYNSKI 


TWILIGHT ZONE 23 



RETURN OF THE ZONE 


June 11, 1963, and "Many, Many Monkeys," written by William 
Froug, dated January 20, 1964. My task: to review them and 
determine which, if any, we could produce for TZ3. 

We picked "Many, Many Monkeys." It was a chilling story 
about the consequences of our continued inhumanity, our 
decision not to see the problems and pains that afflict our fel- 
lows. In that respect, the story was as timely now as when it 
was first written. Only minor revisions were required to 
bring it up to date in other respects. It was technical stuff, 
mainly. One of the plot complications is attributed to an 
atomic test in the atmosphere, something which isn't done 
anymore, and even if it were done, we know now that the 
radiation wouldn't have the effects necessary for the story. 
An accident at a biological warfare plant was substituted. 

Directed by Richard Bugajski, "Many, Many Monkeys" 
stars Karen Valentine as the nurse who becomes involved in 
the resulting plague in an intriguing manner. . .a plot 
description also applicable to the script as it was written 
twenty-five years ago for the original Twilight Zone. It was 
a nice way to end the writing season, further confirming our 
commitment to meld the old TZ with the new. 

What goes around. . .comes around. 

More than you'd ever suspect. 

Private Triumphs, Public Disappointments 

As the Constant Reader has probably guessed by now, a lot 
of people invested tremendou* amounts of time, and effort, 
and blood, and dreams in trying to bring The Twilight Zone 
back from that silent place TV shows go when they are can- 
celed. To the extent that we succeeded, we are gratified, and 
couldn't have asked for better. 

But one aspect remains to sadden us all. (Actually, 
"sadden" is an understatement, but I'm trying desperately 
here to retain some degree of journalistic objectivity.) 

Very often, when I tell people that I'm working on the 
new Twilight Zone, the usual response is, "Oh, I didn't know 
that was back on." And that is the heart of the one problem 
that has afflicted TZ3 since its release— a problem that many 
of you may have noticed by now. 

After all the effort to produce the shows, there was vir- 
tually no follow-up to promote the series. In point of fact, 
about two weeks before the show hit the air— after constant 
complaints from our office to MGM/UA that there had been 
no ads, no articles, no attempt to contact magazines, no men- 
tion in the trades, no mention in the many articles summing 
up the new sf/fantasy series (USA Today missed us three 
times running, mentioning every other syndicated series from 
Friday the 13th to War of the Worlds) . . . after all that, we 
learned that there was virtually no money allocated to pro- 
mote TZ3, and that the few P.R. people at MGM/UA who 
had been slotted to handle the show had been terminated. 

Two weeks to air, we had been orphaned. 

There's this syndrome I call the Trap Door Complex. It 
comes to the accompaniment of thunder and blood pounding 
in your ears. It is that terrible, glacier-like feeling that chills 
you to the bone as you hang up the phone and realize that 
you have been cut off at the knees. A sense of weightlessness 
as the trap door opens beneath you and you fall, and you 
know there's not a damned thing you can do about it. 

The TZ3 trap door opened when we heard that news, 
and we all fell through it. Good intentions, hard effort, scripts 
and cast and crew. ..all of it. Because it wouldn't matter 
how well we had done our jobs if no one knew we existed. 

We shifted gears as quickly as possible. In the midst of 
editing the last few episodes, I requisitioned all the P.R. 
material to be sent to my office. I then began a one-man 


publicity campaign. Phone calls were placed and letters sent 
to newspapers, magazines, TV and radio stations. On several 
occasions I found myself giving a phone interview while 
simultaneously editing a script. If it had not been for the 
support of the TZ3 West Coast crew, including Suzy Eliot, 
our peripatetic secretrary/bringer of cheer/raider of my 
chocolate vault, I think I would have gone mad. As it was, 
outbursts were confined to occasional crazed memos, exem- 
plified by the following, sent to my producer and— well, 
someone else: 

To: Rod Serling, Address Unknown 

From: J. Michael Straczynski 
Date: 20 September 1938 
Re: Publicity, and Your Show 

Dear Mr. Serling, 

It may come as some surprise to you that we have re- 
vived your series for yet a third incarnation. We regret the 
delay in your discovery, but for what it’s worth, it appears 
that virtually no one knows about the new show. I know this 
may be difficult to believe— after all, The Twilight Zone is 
one of the most easily marketable names in the history of 
American television— but it is quite true. 

We’ve learned of late that we fall under the umbrella of 
MGM/UA HPP (Hidden Program Project). The idea of this 
program, as near as we can determine, is to keep the Ameri- 
can public utterly and completely in the dark concerning 
the existence of any programs under that heading. Calls from 
press eager to provide coverage and interviews are not 
returned, no attempt is made to foster a relationship with 
magazines (especially with TV Guide, that focus for all evil 
in the world), and responsibility is circulated around so that 
no one is really sure who should be spoken to about what. 

You’ll note the attached clipping [from USA Today], in 
which every other syndicated series on the planet is men- 
tioned— except the new Twilight Zone. This is at least the 
third article with this sort of glaring omission. We are very 
pleased to see that MGM’s HPP is working away overtime, 
keeping us from being associated with the product of other 
studios not as fortunate in having their own HPP. 

We’re reasonably sure that the HPP is similar to the 
U.S. Forestry’s “Let It Burn” program, which has given a 
new and far more streamlined look to Yellowstone National 
Park. 

This may seem a curious way to do business, but we’re 
assured that this is truly the best way. And we support it 
wholeheartedly. There is, after all, rio real challenge in mar- 
keting something as instantly recognizable as The Twilight 
Zone. Even a hydrocephalic infant could get us coverage in, 
say, TV Guide or The Los Angeles Times or any of a hun- 
dred other newspapers. And if there’s no challenge, there’s 
no point in trying. This is an admirable, a courageous 
stance, and we’re mightily impressed. We hope that those 
handling the P.R. on this show can eventually find some- 
thing up to their abilities— perhaps; helping market Ausch- 
witz as a health spa .... 

That the show has done as well as it has, without the 
benefit of a decent publicity campaign, is the best testimony 
to the response to our efforts that one could ask for. 

Such is life. 

So it goes. 

Selah. 

Present Tense, Future Imperfect 

From the day Tappan King commissioned these articles, I 
conceived of them as letters written to an unseen friend, as 
honest and as personal as I could make them. And now that 
I come at last to the end of this report from inside the third 

CONTINUED ON PAGE 87 


24 TWILIGHT ZONE 



RETURN OF THE ZONE 





4jgta 


Atlantis Films head Seaton McLain, aka "The Man 
from Atlantis." 


Sue Phillips, production coordinator for Atlantis 
Films' Toronto studios. 


TWILIGHT ZONE 25 





FICTION BY JOHN VA R L E Y 


JUST RNOTHER 
PERFECT 
DRV 


ILLUSTRATION BY 
PETER SCANLON 


Don't Worry. 

Everything is under control. 

I know how you're feeling. You 
wake up alone in a strange room, you 
get up, you look around, you soon dis- 
cover that both doors are locked from 
the outside. It's enough to unsettle any- 
body, especially when you try and try 
and try to recall how you got here and 
you just can't do it. 

But beyond that . . . there's this feel- 
ing. I know you're feeling it right now. 
I know a lot of things — and I'll reveal 
them all as we go along. 

One of the things I know is this: 

If you will sit down, put this mes- 
sage back on the table where you found 
it, and take slow, deep breaths while 
counting to one hundred, you'll feel a 
lot better. 

I promise you will. 

Do that now. 

See what I mean? You do feel a lot 
better. 

That feeling won't last for long. I'm 
sorry to say. 

I wish there was an easier way to 
do this, but there isn't, and believe me, 
many ways have been tried. So here we 
go: 

This is not 1986. 

You are not twenty-five years old. 

The date is 

January February March April May June 

man i 4 la tt 12 

ip oa ?nns 

£vw awr Lt\J\JO 

A lot of things have happened in 

twenty twenty one twenty-two 

years, and I'll tell you all you need to 
know about that in good time. ► 


When things seem 
darkest, you may wish 
you could wake up 
tomorrow with a new 
life-a clean slate. But 
what kind of price 
would you have to pay! 


TWILIGHT ZONE 27 




PERFECT DRV 


This morning you woke 
up and couldn’t remem- 
ber anything after the 
summer of '86. But the 
year is 2008, and we’re 
beginning to think a 
pattern is established. 


For now. . .Don't Worry. 

Slow, deep breaths. Close your 
eyes. Count to a hundred. 

You'll feel better. 

I promise. 

If you'll get up now, you'll find that 
the bathroom door will open. There's a 
mirror in there. Take a look in it, get to 
know the 

forty five forty -s ix forty-seven 

-year- old who will be in there, looking 
back at you. . . 

And Don't Worry. 

Take deep breaths, and so forth. 

I'll tell you more when you get 
back. 

Well. 

I know how rough that was. I know 
you're trembling. I know you're feeling 
confusion, fear, anger. . .a thousand 
emotions. 

And I know you have a thousand 
questions. They will all be answered, 
every one of them, at the proper time. 

Here are some ground rules. 

I will never lie to you. You can't 
imagine how much care and anguish 
has gone into the composition of this 
letter. For now, you must take my word 
that things will be revealed to you in 
the most useful order, and in the easiest 
way that can be devised. You must ap- 
preciate that not all your questions can 
be answered at once. It may be harder 
for you to accept that some questions 
cannot be answered at all until a prop- 
er background has been prepared. These 
answers would mean nothing to you at 
this point. 

You would like someone — anyone 
— to be with you right now, so you 
could ask these questions. That has 
been tried, and the results were need- 
lessly chaotic and confusing. Trust me; 
this is the best way. 

And why should you trust me? For 
a very good reason. 

I am you. You wrote — in a manner 
of speaking — every word in this letter, 
to help yourself through this agonizing 
moment. 

Deep breaths, please. 

Stay seated; it helps a little. 

And Don't Worry. 

So now we're past bombshell #2. There 
are more to come, but they will be easi- 
er to take, simply because your capaci- 
ty to be surprised is just about at its 
peak right now. A certain numbness will 
set in. You should be thankful for that. 

And now, back to your questions. 


Top of the list: What happened? 

Briefly (and it must be brief — more 
on that later): 

In 1989 you had an accident. It in- 
volved a motorcycle which you don't 
remember owning because you didn't 
buy it until 1988, and a city bus. You 
had a difference of opinion concerning 
the right of way, and the bus won. 

Feel your scalp with your finger- 
tips. Don't be queasy; it healed long 
ago — as much as it's going to. Under 
those great knots of scar tissue are the 
useless results of the labors of the best 
neurosurgeons in the country. In the 
end, they just had to scoop out a lot of 
gray matter and close you back up, 
shaking their heads sagely and opining 
that you would probably feel right at 
home under glass on a salad bar. 

But you fooled them. You woke 
up, and there v/as much rejoicing, even 
though you couldn't remember anything 
after the summer of '86. You were con- 
scious a few hours, long enough for the 
doctors to determine that your intelli- 
gence didn't seem to be impaired. You 
could talk, read, speak, see, hear. Then 
you went back to sleep. 

The next day you woke up, and 
couldn't remember anything after the 
summer of '86. No one was too wor- 
ried. They told you again what had 
happened. You were awake most of the 
day, and again you fell asleep. 

The next day you woke up, and 
couldn't remember anything after the 
summer of '86. Some consternation was 
expressed. 

The next day you woke up, and 
couldn't remember anything after the 
summer of '86. Professorial heads were 
scratched, seven-syllable Latin words in- 
toned, and deep mumbles were mumbled. 

The next day you woke up, and 
couldn't remember anything after the 
summer of '86. 

And the next day 

And the next day 

And the day after that. 

This morning you woke up and 
couldn't remember anything after the 
summer of '86, and I know this is get- 
ting old, but I had to make the point in 
this way, because it is 

2006 2002 2008 

and we've begun to think a pattern is 
established. 

No, no, don't breathe deeply, don't 
count to one hundred, face this one 
head on. It'll be good for you. 

Back under control? 

I knew you could do it. 

What you have is called Progres- 


28 TWILIGHT ZONE 





sive Narco-Catalepti-Amnesiac Syn- 
drome (PNCAS, or "Pinkus" in conver- 
sation), and you should be proud of 
yourself, because they made up the 
term to describe your condition and at 
least a half-dozen papers have been 
written proving it can't happen. What 
seems to happen, in spite of the papers, 
is that you store and retrieve memories 
just fine as long as you have a continu- 
ous thread of consciousness. But the 
sleep center somehow activates an erase 
mechanism in your head, so that all 
you experienced during the day is lost 
to you when you wake up again. The 
old memories are intact and vivid; the 
new ones are ephemeral, like they were 
recorded on a continuous tape loop. 

Most amnesias of this type behave 
rather differently. Retrograde amnesia 
is seen fairly frequently, whereby you 
gradually lose even the old memories 
and become as an infant. And progres- 
sive amnesias are not unknown, but 
those poor people can't remember what 
happened to them as little as five min- 
utes ago. Try to imagine what life would 
be like in those circumstances before 
you start crying in your beer. 

Yeah, great, I hear you whine. And 
what's so great about this ? 

Well, nothing, at first glance. I'll 
certainly be the last one to argue about 


that. My own re-awakening is too fresh 
in my mind, having happened only fif- 
teen hours ago. And, in a sense, I will 
soon be dead, snatched back from this 
mayfly existence by the greedy arms of 
Morpheus. When I sleep tonight, most 
of what I feel to be me will vanish. I 
will awake, an older and less wise man, 
to confusion, will read this letter, will 
breathe deeply, count to one hundred, 
stare into the mirror at a stranger. I will 
be you. 

And yet, now, as I scan rapidly 
through this letter for the second time 
today (I said I wrote it, but only in a 
sense; it was written by a thousand 
mayflies), they are asking me if there is 
anything I wish to change. If I want a 
change, Marian will see that it is made. 
Is there anything I would like to do 
differently tomorrow? Is there something 
I want to tell you, my successor in this 
body, to beware of, to disbelieve? Are 
there any warnings I would issue? 

The answer is no. 

I will let this letter stand, in its en- 
tirety. 

There are things still for you to 
learn that will convince you, against all 
common sense, that you have a won- 
derful life /day ahead of you. 

But you need a rest. You need time 
to think. 


Do this for me. Go back to the 
date. Mark out the last number and 
write ij the next. If it's a new month, 
change that, too. 

Now you will find the other door 
will open. Please go into the next room, 
where you will find breakfast, and an 
envelope containing the next part of 
this letter. 

Don't open it yet. Eat your breakfast. 

Think it over. 

But don't take too long. Your time is 
short, and you won't want to waste it. 

That was refreshing, wasn't it? 

It shouldn't surprise you that all 
your favorite breakfast foods were on 
the table. You eat the same meal every 
morning, and never get tired of it. 

And I'm sorry if that statement 
took some of the pleasure out of the 
meal, but it is necessary for me to keep 
reminding you of your circumstances, to 
prevent a cycle of denial getting started. 

Here is the thing you must bear in 
mind. 

Today is the rest of your life. 

Because that life will be so short, it 
is essential that you waste none of it. In 
this letter I have sometimes stated the 
obvious, written out conclusions you 
have already reached — in a sense, wast- 
ed your time. Each time it was done — 


TWILIGHT ZONE 29 


PERFECT DRV 


Now about the Martians. 
You are their fair-haired 
boy. Why? Because you 
don’t experience time 
like the rest of humanity 
does. The Martians spend 
time with people like 
you. We think they want 
to teach us something. 


and each time it will yet be done in the 
rest of this letter — was for a purpose. 
Points must be driven home, sometimes 
brutally, sometimes repetitiously. I prom- 
ise you this sort of thing will be kept to 
an absolute minimum. 

So here comes a few paragraphs 
that might be a waste of time, but really 
aren't, as they dispose neatly of several 
thousand of the most burning questions 
in your mind. The questions can be 
summed up as "What has happened in 
twenty years?" 

The answer is: You don't care. 

You can't afford to care. Even a 
brief synopsis of recent events would 
take hours to read, and would be the 
sheerest foolishness. You don't care 
who the President is. The price of gaso- 
line doesn't concern you, nor does the 
victor in the '98 World Series. Why 
learn this trivia when you would only 
have to re-learn it tomorrow? 

You don't care which books and 
movies are currently popular. You have 
read your last book, seen your last movie. 

Luckily, you are an orphan with no 
siblings or other close relatives. (It is 
lucky; think about it.) The girl you were 
going with at the time of your accident 
has forgotten all about you— and you 
don't care, because you didn't love her. 

There are things that have hap- 
pened which you need to know about; 
I'll speak of them very soon. 

In the meantime .... 

How do you like the room? Not at 
all like a hospital, is it? Comfortable 
and pleasant— yet it has no windows, 
and the only other door was locked 
when you tried it. 

Try it again. It will open now. 

And remember. . . 

Don't Worry. 

Don't Worry. Don't Worry. Don't 
Worry. 

You will have stopped crying by 
now. I know you desperately need some- 
one to talk to, a human face to look 
into. You will have that very soon now, 
but for another few minutes I still must 
reach out to you from your recent past. 

Incidentally, the reason the breath- 
ing exercises and the counting are so ef- 
fective is a post-hypnotic suggestion left 
in your mind. When you see the words 
Don't Worry, it relaxes you. It seems 
that some part of your mind retains 
shadows of memory that you can't reach 
— which may also account for why you 
believe all this apparent rubbish. 

Are the tears dry? It did the same 
thing to me. Even seeing my own face 
aged in the mirror didn't affect me like 
seeing the view from my windows. 


Then it became real. 

You are on one of the top floors of 
the Chrysler Building. Your view to the 
north included many, many buildings 
that were not there in 1986, and jum- 
bled among them were many familiar 
buildings, distinctive as fingerprints. 
This is New York, and it is a new cen- 
tury, and that view is impossible to 
deny and as real as a fist. That's why 
you wept. 

Not too many more bombshells to 
go now. But the next one is a doozy. 
Let's creep up on it, shall we? 

You've already looked at the three 
photographs on the table beside your 
breakfast. Consider them now, in order. 

The big, bluff, hearty-looking fel- 
low is Ian MacIntyre, whom you'll meet 
in a few minutes. He will be your coun- 
selor/companion today, and he is the head 
of a very important project in which you 
are involved. It's impossible not to like 
him, though you, like me, will try to 
resist at first. But he is too wise to push 
it, and you've always liked people, any- 
way. Besides, he has a lot of experience 
in winning your friendship, having done 
so every day for eight years. 

On to the second picture. 

Looks almost human, doesn't he? If 
the offspring of Gumby and E.T. could 
be considered human. He is humanoid: 
two eyes, nose, mouth, two arms and 
two legs, and that goofy grin. The green 
skin you'll get used to quickly enough. 

What he is, is a Martian. 

See, fifteen years ago the Martians 
landed and took over the planet Earth. 
We still don't know what they plan to 
do with it, but some of the theories are 
not good news for Homo sapiens. 

Don't Worry. 

Take a few deep breaths. Ill wait. 

That last thought is unworthy of you 
and unjust. I would not waste your 
time with a practical joke. You must 
realize I can back up what I say. 

To illustrate, I want you to go to 
the south windows of your apartment. 
Go through the billiard room into the 
spa, turn left at the gym, and open the 
door beside the Picasso, the one that 
didn't open before. You'll find yourself 
in an area with a view of the Narrows, 
and I'm sure I won't need to direct you 
beyond that. 

Take a look, and come right back. 

All right, you just had to prove you 
could do things your own way, didn't 
you? I don't care that you brought the 
letter with you, but your having done 
so provides one last bit of proof that I 
know you pretty well, doesn't it? 


30 TWILIGHT ZONE 



Now, back to the bloody Martians. 

It's amazing how on-target Steve 
Spielberg was, isn't it? The way that 
ship floats out there, .and it's bigger 
than the mother ship in Close Encoun- 
ters. That sucker is over thirty miles 
across. At its lowest point it is two 
miles in the air. The upper parts reach 
into space. It has floated out there for 
fifteen years and not budged one inch. 
People call it The Saucer. There are fif- 
teen others just like it, hovering near 
other major cities. 

And you think you have detected a 
flaw, don't you? How would you have 
seen it, you ask, if it had been a cloudy 
day? If it had been just a normal New 
York smoggy day, for that matter. Then 
you'd be reading this, scratching your 
head, wondering what the hell I'm talk- 
ing about. 

The answer will illustrate every- 
one's concern. There are no more 
cloudy days in New York. The Martians 
don't seem to like rain, so they don't let 
it happen here. As for the smog. . .they 
told us to stop it, and we did. Wouldn't 
you, with that thing floating out there? 

About the name, Martians. . . 

We first detected their ships in the 
neighborhood of Mars. I know you'd 
have found it easier to swallow, in a 
perverse way, had I told you they came 
from Alpha Centauri or the Andromeda 


Galaxy or the planet Tralfamadore. But 
people got to calling them Martians be- 
cause that's what they were called on 
television. 

We don't think they're really from 
Mars. 

We don't know where they're 
from, but it's probably not from around 
here. And , by that, I mean not just an- 
other galaxy, but another universe. We 
think our own universe exists sort of as 
a shadow of them. 

This will be hard to explain. Take 
it slowly. 

Do you remember Flatland, and 
Mr. A Square? He lived in a two-dimen- 
sional universe. There was no up or 
down, just right and left, forward and 
backward. He could not conceive the 
notion of up or down. Mr. Square was 
visited by a three-dimensional being, a 
sphere, who drifted down through the 
world of Flatland. Square perceived the 
sphere as a circle that gradually grew, 
and then shrank. All he could see at 
any one moment was a cross-section of 
the sphere, while the sphere, god-like, 
could look down into Mr. Square's world, 
even touch inside Square's body with- 
out going through the skin. 

It was all just an interesting intellec- 
tual exercise, until the Martians arrived. 
Now we think they're like the sphere, 
and we are Mr. Square. They live in 


another dimension, and they don't per- 
ceive time and space like we do. 

An example: 

Ydfa saw they appeared humanoid. 
We don't think they really are. 

We think they simply allow us to 
see a portion of their bodies which they 
project into our three-dimensional world 
and cause to appear humanoid. Their 
real shape must be vastly complex. 

Consider your hand. If you thrust 
your fingers into Flatland, Mr. Square 
would see four circles and not imagine 
them to be connected. Putting your hand 
in further, he would see the circles 
merge into an oblong. Or an even bet- 
ter analogy is the shadow-play. By suit- 
ably entwining your two hands in front 
of a light, you can cast a shadow on a 
wall that resembles a bird, or a bull, or 
an elephant, or even a man. What we 
see of the Martians is no more real 
than a Kermit the Frog hand puppet. 

The ship is the same way. We see 
merely a three-dimensional cross-sec- 
tion of a much larger and more com- 
plex structure. 

At least we think so. 

Communication with the Martians 
is very frustrating, nearly impossible. 
They are so foreign to us. They never 
tell us anything that makes sense, never 
say the same thing twice. We assume it 
would make sense if we could think the 


TWILIGHT ZONE 31 





% 

IT 

PERFECT DRV 


Let us speak of love for 
a moment. Let me tell 
you, Marian is in love 
with you, and before the 
day is over, you will be in 
love with her. For you, it’s 
always the first time. . . . 


way they do. 

And it is important. 

They are very powerful. Weather 
control is just a parlor trick. When they 
invaded, they invaded all at once— and 
I hope I can explain this to you, as I'm 
far from sure I understand it myself, 
after a full day with Martians. 

They invaded fifteen years ago. . . 
but they also invaded in 1854, and in 
1520, and several other times in the 
"past." The past seems to be merely an- 
other direction to them, like up or down. 
You'll be shown books, old books, with 
woodcuts and drawings and contempo- 
rary accounts of how the Martians ar- 
rived, what they did, when they left . . . 
and don't be concerned that you don't 
remember these momentous events from 
your high school history class, because 
no one else does, either. 

Do you begin to understand? It 
seems that, from the moment they ar- 
rived here, in the late part of the twen- 
tieth century, they changed the past so 
that they had already arrived several 
times before. We have the history books 
to prove that they did. The fact that no 
one remembers these stories being in the 
history books before they arrived this 
time must be seen as an object lesson. 
One assumes they could have changed 
our memories of events as easily as the 
events themselves. That they did not do 
so means they meant us to be im- 
pressed. Had they changed both the 
events and our memories of them, no 
one would be the wiser; we would all 
assume history had always been that 
way, because that's the way we remem- 
bered it. 

The whole idea of history books 
must be a tremendous joke to them, 
since they don't experience time con- 
secutively. 

Had enough? There's more. 

They can do more than add things 
to our history. They can take things 
away. Things like the World Trade Cen- 
ter. That's right, go look for it. It's not 
out there, and we didn't tear it down. It 
never existed in this world, except in 
our memories. It's like a big, shared 
illusion. 

Other things have turned up miss- 
ing as well. Things such as Knoxville, 
Tennessee; Lake Huron; the Presidency 
of William McKinley; the Presbyterian 
Church; the rhinoceros (including the 
fossil record of its ancestors); Jack the 
Ripper (and all the literary works written 
about him); the letter Q; and Ecuador. 

Presbyterians still remember their 
faith and have built new churches to re- 
place the ones that were never built. 
Who needed the goddamn rhino,anyway? 


Another man served McKinley's term 
(and was also assassinated). Seeing 
book after book where "kw" replaces 
"q" is only amusing — and very kweer. 
But the people of Knoxville— and a doz- 
en other towns around the world — never 
existed. They are still trying to sort out 
the real estate around where Lake Huron 
used to be. And you can search the 
world's atlases in vain for any sight of 
Ecuador. 

The best wisdom is that the Martians 
could do even more, if they wanted to. 
Such as wiping out the element oxygen, 
the charge on the electron, or, of 
course, the planet Earth. 

They invaded, and they won quite 
easily. 

And their weapon is very much 
like an editor's blue pencil. Rather than 
destroy our world, they re-write it. 

So WHAT DOES ALL THIS HAVE TO DO WITH 
me, I hear you cry. 

Why couldn't I have lived out my 
one day on Earth without worrying 
about this? 

Well. . .who do you think is paying 
for this fabulous apartment? 

The grateful taxpayers, that's who. 
You didn't think you'd get original 
Picassos on the walls if you were noth- 
ing more than a brain-damaged geek, 
did you? 

And why are the taxpayers grateful? 

Because anything that keeps the 
Martians happy, keeps the taxpayers 
happy. The Martians scare hell out of 
everyone . . . and you are their fair- 
haired boy. 

Why? 

Because you don't experience time 
like the rest of humanity does. 

You start fresh every day. You 
haven't had fifteen years to think about 
the Martians, you haven't developed 
any prejudice toward them or their way 
of thinking. 

Maybe. 

Most of that could be bullshit. We 
don't know if prejudice has anything to 
do with it . . .but you do see time differ- 
ently. The fact is, the best mathemati- 
cians and physicists in the world have 
tried to deal with the Martians, and the 
Martians aren't interested. Every day 
they come to talk to you. 

Most days, nothing is accomplished. 
They spend an hour, then go wherever 
it is they go, in whatever manner they 
do it. One day out of a hundred, you 
get an insight. Everything I've told you 
so far is the result of those insights be- 
ing compiled — 

— along with the work of others. 
There are a few hundred of you, around 


32 TWILIGHT ZONE 


the world. No other man or woman 
has your peculiar affliction; all are 
what most people would call mentally 
limited. There are the progressive am- 
nesiacs I mentioned earlier. There are 
people with split-brain disorders, peo- 
ple with almost unbelievable perceptual 
aberrations, such as the woman who has 
lost the concept of "right." Left is the only 
direction that exists in her brain. 

The Martians spend time with these 
people, people like you. 

So we tentatively conclude this 
about the Martians: 

They want to teach us something. 

It is painfully obvious they could 
have destroyed us any time they wished 
to do so. They have enslaved us, in the 
sense that we are pathetically eager to 
do anything we even suspect they might 
want us to do. But they don't seem to 
want to do anything with us. They've 
made no move to breed us for meat ani- 
mals, conscript us into slave labor camps, 
or rape women. They have simply ar- 
rived, demonstrated their powers, and 
started talking to people like you. 

No one knows if we can learn what 
they are trying to teach us. But it be- 
hooves us to try, wouldn't you think? 

Again, you say: Why me? 

Or even more to the point: Why 
should I care? 

I know your bitterness, and I un- 
derstand it. Why should you spend even 
an hour of your precious time on prob- 
lems you don't really care about, when 
it would be much easier and more satis- 
fying spending your sixteen hours of 
awareness gnawing on yourself, wal- 
lowing in self-pity, and in general being 
a one-man soap opera. 

There are two reasons. 

One: You were never that kind of 
person. You've just about exhausted 
your store of self-pity during the pro- 
cess of reading this letter. If you have 
only one day— though it hurts like hell 
... so be it! You will spend that day do- 
ing something useful. 

Reason number two. . . 

You've been looking at the third 
picture off and on since you first picked 
it up, haven't you? (Come on, you can't 
lie to me.) 

She's very pretty, isn't she? 

And that thought is unworthy of 
you, since you know where this letter is 
coming from. She would not be offered 
to you as a bribe. The project managers 
know you well enough to avoid offer- 
ing you a piece of ass to get your 
cooperation. 

Her name is Marian. 

Let us speak of love for a moment. 


You were in love once before. You 
remember how it was, if you'll allow 
yourself. You remember the pain . . . but 
that came later, didn't it? When she re- 
jected you. Do you remember what it 
felt like the day you fell in love ? Think 
back, you can get it. 

The simple fact is, it's why the 
world spins. Just the possibility of love 
has kept you going in the three years 
since Karen. 

Well, let me tell you. Marian is in 
love with you, and before the day is 
over, you will be in love with her. You 
can believe that or not, as you choose, 
but I, at the end of my life here this 
day, can take as one of my few consola- 
tions that I /you will have, tomorrow/ 
today, the exquisite pleasure of falling 
in love with Marian. 

I envy you, you skeptical bastard. 

And since it's just you and me. I'll add 
this. Even with a girl you don't love, 
"the first time" is always pretty damn 
interesting, isn't it? 

For you, it's always the first time . . . 
except when it's the second time, just 
before you sleep. . .which Marian seems 
to be suggesting this very moment. 

As USUAL, I HAVE ANTICIPATED ALL YOUR 
objections. 

You think it might be tough for 
her? You think she's suffering? 

Okay. Admitted, the first few hours 
are what you might call repetitive for 
her. You gotta figure she's bored, by 


now, at your invariant behavior when 
you first wake up. But it is a cross she 
bears willingly for the pleasure of your 
company during the rest of the day. 

She is a healthy, energetic girl, one 
who is aware that no woman ever had 
such an attentive, energetic lover. She 
loves a man who is endlessly fascinated 
by her, body and soul, who sees her 
with new eyes each and every day. 

She loves your perpetual enthusiasm, 
your renewable infatuation. 

There isn't time to fall out of love. 

Anything more I could say would 
be wasting your time, and believe me, 
when you see what today is going to be 
like, you'd hate me for it. 

We could wish things were differ- 
ent. It is not fair that we have only one 
day. I, who am at the end of it, can feel 
the pain you only sense. I have my 
wonderful memories. . which will soon 
be gone. And I have Marian, for a few 
more minutes. 

But I swear to you, I feel like an 
old, old man who has lived a full life, 
who has no regrets for anything he ever 
did, who accomplished something in his 
life, who loved, and was loved in 
return. 

Can many "normal" people die say- 
ing that? 

In just a few seconds that one, last 
locked door will open, and your new 
life and future love will come through 
it. 1 guarantee it will be interesting. 

I love you, and I now leave you . . . 

Have a nice day. ■ 



TWILIGHT ZONE 33 





a 

rw 


In life she had given 
him a priceless seed of 
inspiration* Now she 
was about to give him 
the most precious gift 
of all ... . 


W 


A TZ FIRST BY 

DAN BENNETT 


ILLUSTRATION BY ROGER De MUTH 


"Nothing's ever gone, child," Maggie 
was saying. I stood in the front room of 
the tiny old public library, sobbing, 
nine years old and confronted for the 
first time with death. Uncle Warren — 
my favorite uncle, the one who had 
taught me to spit and to fish on his 
farm in South Carolina— was dead. 

My mother was broken up, and 
my father was busy making the funeral 
arrangements. But the library had al- 
ways felt like home. 

"Close your eyes, honey." Maggie's 
big, dark arms reached out to me, and 
I leaned gratefully into them. "Think of 
your old uncle, Stevie. Are your eyes 
closed? You see him there?" 

I did, and the pain and fear began 
to fade. 

"You've still got him, Stevie. He's 
still there. Nobody's ever really gone, 
child. Life goes on." 

I believed her. 

That was twenty years ago. 

I REMEMBER THE SMELL OF GRASS THICK 
with early-morning dampness and — 
even from back where I stood with 
Anita and Rod — the smell of the grave, 
of mildew and red Georgia clay. 

The old woman's family stood 
nearer the coffin, huddled together 
against the chill under a canopy of dark 
green canvas. 

Just like when I was a boy, I felt 
out of place among these people, even 
Rod and Anita. There was something I 
didn't understand — I couldn't grasp the 
faith they had, none of them crying, 
just clutching their Bibles to their hearts 
as if they could wring out of the books 
some comfort. 

Ashes to ashes, the preacher said. 
Dust to dust, and the big oak box 
began to vanish, slowly sinking into a 
dark hole in the earth. 

And Maggie was gone. 

I stood with Rod and Anita, none 
of us saying a word, as the other 
mourners drifted away. Finally alone in 
the cemetery, we walked in quiet uni- 
son to the edge of the grave. We stood 
silent there for a minute, maybe two — 
but in our minds, I know, two decades 
passed. 

"Thanks for calling me. Rod." I 
said, and Anita said, "Yeah. Me, too." 

"I figured you'd both want to come ^ 


34 TWILIGHT ZONE 



TWILIGHT ZONE 35 





Maggie 

There 
between Asimov 
and Bester were 
six new ones, 
written by a man 
named Stephen 
Barclay. 

My books. 

Maggie hadn’t 
forgotten! 


back out here for this." Rod scuffed his 
feet in the grass, uneasy. "Just wish we 
all could have gotten back together 
under better circumstances." 

"It's funny," I said, "We all must 
have spent half our lives in that library. 
Maggie looked old enough, even then. 
Guess I thought she'd be around forever." 

"She almost was," Rod said. "She 
worked at the library right up until the 
end. If she'd stuck around a little bit 
longer, I could've taken Amy to see her." 

'Amy?" 

"My daughter. She's three. God, 
Steve, it has been a long time, hasn't it?" 

"I've got a kid, too," Anita said. 
She brightened a bit, until I could al- 
most see the little girl I'd known. 'An 
eight-month-old boy. Named William 
Reed, after my husband." 

"How about you, Steve? Did you 
ever take time off from your writing to 
get married?" 

"Yeah. Her name's Michelle. She's 
terrific" 

Rod grinned. "You have a kid?" 

"No. No such luck." I caught my- 
self staring into the grave, then looked 
up and forced a smile. "We'd like to. We 
really would." 


"Listen," Rod said, breaking the 
sudden tension. "I promised Maggie's 
sister I'd go to the library and collect 
some stuff for her— family pictures, 
that kind of thing. Would — uh . . . 
would you two like to go along and see 
the old place again?" 

"No," Anita said. "But I think I 
have to." I knew how she felt. 

I didn't go straight to the library. I 
told Rod and Anita I'd meet them there, 
then went back to my hotel room. No 
messages yet, the desk clerk said, and I 
had to remind myself that it was still 
early morning in L.A.; still a couple of 
hours before I would hear any word 
from Michelle. 

Unable to stall any longer, I head- 
ed for the library. 

The two-lane road curved easily, 
never exposing what lay beyond the 
next row of pine trees and dimly famil- 
iar houses. It would have been easier to 
find my way if I could have left behind 
the rented Buick with its smells of plas- 
tic and vinyl and become a boy again, 
blanketed in the sweet smell of pines 
and magnolias, pedaling my three-speed 
Schwinn and listening to the Four Tops 


on the little radio taped between the 
handlebars. 

I heard a loud clanging from up 
ahead, then a long, high whistle. When 
I reached the railroad crossing, the 
gates were already down and a train 
was rolling through. 

I stopped there, watching the 
brown and orange boxcars rattling past, 
and everything fell into place as if some- 
one had found a map of the old town 
in a comer of my head and unfolded it 
again. 

Beyond the train, I knew, was 
Mick's Country Store— a genuine slice 
of small-town America, an Old-South 
cliche brought to glorious life, with 
wooden floors and a big glass pickle jar 
on the counter. 

My heartbeat quickened as I wait- 
ed for the train to pass, and distantly I 
thought I might stop in the old store 
and get myself a Nehi Orange from the 
big, steel cooler in the back. I could al- 
most taste the drink, feel the ridged 
glass bottle in my hands, when the last 
boxcar passed, and — 

— nothing. 

I stared in disbelief at an empty 
lot, overgrown with weeds and filled 


36 TWILIGHT ZONE 



with cast-off garbage - the red, rusted 
husks of gutted cars and refrigerators 
lay where Mick's had been. Across the 
street stood a Seven-Eleven, bright and 
shrill and gaudy, its huge iceboxes filled 
with aluminum cans and bottles made 
of plastic 

Twenty years. They had seemed so 
short to me. 

I stepped on the gas, suddenly 
needing to be away from the place. The 
Buick bolted roughly across the rail- 
road tracks and over the next hill. 

And I saw the library. 

There were already two cars in the 
gravel lot when I turned the Buick up 
the drive. Rod and Anita stood waiting 
at the front door. 

"It's closed," Anita said, and she 
rattled the locked door to show me. 
"No big surprise, I guess." 

1 smiled. "Remember when we 
were kids, and Maggie'd let us sneak 
our books back a day late, on Sunday? 
1 wonder if—" 

Rod was on his knees before I fin- 
ished speaking. He tugged at a loose 
brick at the edge of the doorstep, and 
when it came free, he stood up, holding 
a little brass key. "Bingo! Way to go, 


Steve." He unlocked the door and we 
stepped inside. 

The first thing that hit me was the 
smell of aging paper and cloth— a 
warm, inviting smell, almost a flavor; 
not at all unpleasant. 

I found the light switch, turned it 
on, but some shadows remained; many 
of the old, wavy-glass windows had 
been replaced with duct tape and 
cardboard. 

We crossed the uneven wooden 
floor into the main room, following a 
well-worn path. In the corners sat pie 
plates filled with the previous night's 
rain, filtered though cracks in the 
ceiling. 

The library was firmly rooted in 
the past, but one shelf had always been 
filled with futures. Out of habit, I went 
there first, finding the titles that had 
become the strongest memories of my 
childhood: Dune, Childhood's End, 
Fahrenheit 451, Foundation ... all the 
books I had read and re-read as a child 
—and there between Asimov and Bester 
were six new ones, written by a man 
named Stephen Barclay. 

My books. Maggie hadn't for- 
gotten. 

"Steve! Anita! Take a look at this." 
Rod stood behind the main desk, look- 
ing through the brittle pages of a huge, 
old leather-bound book. 

"It was in the drawer here. I 
couldn't resist . . . just look at it." Rod 
turned the big book so we all could see 
it. "It's some kind of scrapbook. Look, 
there's a picture of you, Steve. Nine 
years old. And this is the article from 
the Herald, when you won that college 
writing contest. What's this other stuff?" 

I leaned in for a close look. 
"Um . . . that's an interview from 
Writer's Digest. These are book 
reviews. Oh, God — that's the first story 
I ever sold, from Galaxy. Not a bad 
one, come to think of it. And this—" 

The last item stopped me cold. It 
was a library card, with one title and a 
date circled in red. 

"Between Planets" I read. "July 20, 
1962. That's the first science fiction 
book I ever read. Maggie—" 

"Maggie picked it out for you," Rod 
said. 'Ask me how I knew that." 

"How7" 

"Look." Rod turned to two more of 
the oversized pages. One began with a 
picture of Rod as a boy, the other with 
a photo of a young Anita. 

Rod's page was filled with little 
clippings, each one announcing the 
construction of a new building some- 
where in the South. There was a big ar- 
ticle from the Herald, "Local man 


makes good," about the awards Rod had 
won for his design of an art gallery in 
Memphis. The library card at the bot- 
tom of the page read "Buildings and 
Bridges, August 11, 1958." 

Anita's page told a similar story— 
Maggie had loaned her a biography of 
Elizabeth Blackwell in 1964. The central 
item on the page was a program from 
Anita's graduation from Johns Hopkins; 
it was surrounded by several papers 
Anita had published in medical 
journals. 

"Lord," Anita whispered. "I, uh. . .1 
don't guess it could be a coincidence, 
could it?" 

"Three times might be a coinci- 
dence," Rod said, "But not this." He 
turned page after page, each one reveal- 
ing another young face and another fu- 
ture. There were at least thirty of 
them, maybe forty, spread out over 
decades. 

"God," Anita said. "She knew. She 
really, really knew." 

"Now wait a minute, you two," I 
said. "Slow down. How do we know 
Maggie didn't put all this together just a 
month ago? It's easy enough to make 
predictions after the fact." 

Rod barely let me finish speaking. 
"Sure it is, Steve, but why in the world 
would she hang on to all these library 
cards and clippings? Some of this stuff 
is twenty-five, thirty years old." 

"I Relieve it." Anita seemed caught 
between reverence and a sort of fear. 
"Maybe it's just because I want to, but 
I believe it." 

"Yeah," Rod said. "Look at it this 
way, Steve — if all this isn't for real, 
maybe it ought to be." 

I didn't argue the point. Instead, I 
made a date to meet them both again 
before I had to leave Atlanta, then walked 
out of the library without another 
word. At the time I thought I was an- 
gry, although I couldn't have said why. 

It wasn't until later that I realized 
the truth: I was envious; I would have 
given anything to believe it all. 

There was a package waiting for me at 
the desk when I got back to the hotel 
that same afternoon. I thought at first 
it must have been from Michelle, but 
the return address was Maggie's. It was 
postmarked two days before she died. 

Inside it was a book: The Growing 
Family. 

Which would have meant very lit- 
tle to me, if not for the phone call that 
came only a minute later. It was 
Michelle. The tests are positive. 

We're having a baby. 

Life goes on ... . I 


TWILIGHT ZONE 37 



A tale of 




woman. 



vegetable. 
Morals Bo 
carefull 


in 


di 



A JZ FIRST RT 



ONSIDER, FOR A MOMENT, THE LOWLY POTATO. A LUMPY, 
grayish-brown root that has never enjoyed the romance so often associated 
with vegetables. It's not gracefully tapered and brilliantly colored like the 
carrot. Nor does it hold lonely housewives in thrall like the versatile cucum- 
ber. It's just a humble, fleshy little tuber, nestled quietly in its bin, never 
making so much as a peep. Like me, if you ever met a potato on the street 
you probably wouldn't give it the time of day. 

You can imagine my alarm when, while I was sitting in the main dining 
room of the Hasenpfefer, my mashed potatoes spoke to me. The voice was a 
little garbled because of the extra schnitzel gravy, but it was definitely the 
potatoes talking. 

"Pssst." I looked down at my plate and blinked my eyes, as if they were 
causing some sort of audio hallucination. 

"Yeah, Runtboy, you. Listen a sec" 

"Who is that?" I asked, prodding at the edge of the mound with my 
fork. 

"Yeah, it's me. Your potatoes. Knock it off with the fork for about half 
a minute, will you?" 

I set the fork down and looked toward the ladies' room. Suzy, my girl- 
friend, had taken off for the powder room with a look of serious intent 
about an hour before. God only knew what she did in there, but if I knew 
my little Suzy she'd be back just in time tor order the single most expensive 
dessert item on the menu. Sometimes she would order two, or even an entree 
for dessert. 

I glanced down at the potatoes and a moment of mutual understanding 
passed between us. Better to finish this little chat before she returned. 

"It's about Suzy," the spuds continued. 

"Yeah, Suzy," I answered, transfixed. 

"Hell of a girl. Nice keester. Frisky. I like her. I like her a lot." And for 
a strange, blurred moment, the potatoes almost seemed to smile. 

"I like her, too." I was still getting used to this, so I just tried to keep 
the conversation going without upsetting the potatoes too much. Deep 
down, in the pit of my stomach, I was beginning to suspect that would not 
be a good idea. 

"Then we agree — this Suzy is a keeper. An A-l, major piece of ord- 
nance. Outstanding." 

The potatoes had raised their voice for a second, and I looked around 
the dining room, expecting to see a few turned heads. But no one else could 
hear the potatoes. That's how it works in the movies. Warren Beatty comes 
back with the body of a potato, and only Jack Warden can hear him. But 
now I could hear all the potatoes iri the restaurant. Most of them were 
screaming, of course, because they were being tom apart and eaten. Some 
of the untouched potatoes were shouting subliminal messages at whoever ^ 



TWILIGHT ZONE 39 


they were sitting in front of, trying to 
put them off their lunch. "Salmonella I" 
shouted a boiled potato sitting next to a 
grilled salmon steak. "Roadkill!" hollered 
the potato pancakes lying next to the 
sauerbraten. Then the forks and knives 
would descend, and the horrible screams 
would begin. As I cupped my hands 
over my ears, I heard the strangely se- 
rene voice of my mashed potatoes. 

"Look, Terry, relax. Those guys are 
just hamming it up. We potatoes get re- 
incarnated the instant we die. And the 
great thing is, we always come back as 
another type of potato. All I ask is that 
when my time comes you finish me off 
fast, so I can hurry back. One of these 
times I'm gonna return as a bag of cajun- 
flavored potato chips. God dammit, I 
love this job! 

"But listen, Terry, the thing is, I 
wanted to tell you that I like Suzy, and 
I think you should marry her." 

"Marry her? Are you nuts?" I knew 
this would upset him, but I couldn't 
help myself. "She's my secretary, for 
Chrissakes! Why should you give a shit 
who I marry? I mean, Jesus, you're a 
lousy plate of yams." 

"I am not a yam," the potatoes 
shouted with remarkable authority, and 
for the first time in my life I feared a 
side dish. "Don't you ever call me a 
yam! 

"Look, kid, listen. First of all, you're 
not doing this for me alone. You're do- 
ing it for the mass, collective conscious- 
ness of all potato-kind. Second, I'm not 
asking you. I'm telling you. You started 
this whole thing last weekend when 
you took Suzy to that sleazy motel and 
started playing around with the instant 
mashed potatoes you ordered from room 
service. Kinky. Most people do that 
sort of thing with whipped cream or 
some such nonsense. You were the first 
person to treat us potatoes so nice. 
Now that we've got a taste of her, we 
need you to keep our fantasy alive. Be 
a sport, Runtman, she's all we've got." 

The potatoes had a sick, smug look 
to them, and suddenly I felt like some 
poor high school schmuck who'd just 
found out his girlfriend had taken on 
the football team. I started to say some- 
thing when I saw Suzy emerge from the 
ladies' room. Suddenly the potatoes 
stopped screaming. Then, quietly at 
first, they started to hum the wedding 
march — the hellish chant slowly build- 
ing in pitch. And my mashed potatoes 
were the loudest of them all. "Here 
comes the bride! Here comes the bride!" 

I grabbed the fork and went to work on 
the potatoes in front of me. They had 
asked for a quick death, but I just laid 
the mound open with my fork and let 


the gravy ooze out. 

'AAAaaaaagh! You bastard! You'll 
pay for this!" they shrieked. "I'll be 
there. Ill be there every time you order 
a bag of fries at McDonalds. Every time 
you open a can of Pringles. No matter 
where you turn, there'll be a potato, 
and one of them will have your name 
on it. You smug little shit. I'll bake in 
hell with you . . . ack . . . aaaaaaaurgh!" 
The last of the gravy had flooded my 
plate, dripping onto the tablecloth. But 
the other potatoes only sang louder, 
their strange, lilting voices winding 
higher and higher like the glee club at 
an insane asylum. I had to make it stop 
before it drove me mad. I turned to the 
next table and hurled a couple of plates 
of potatoes against the wall, cutting off 
their voices with two sickening thuds. 

"Can't you hear them?" I screamed, 
overturning a potato-laden table. "Can’t 
you even hear the potatoes in front of 
you7" But now music was drowning out 
my voice, and it wasn't the wedding 
march; it was the theme from "The 
Newlywed Game." 

I turned to look at Suzy, who was 
standing there in a white dress, and 
suddenly it all fell together: She was 
part of it. She was the one who started 
playing "Cement Mixer" with the pota- 
toes in the first place. She had won them 
over to her side. And now they wanted 
me to marry Suzy and live out their 
twisted fantasies. I looked at Suzy and 
imagined a life of expensive desserts 
and rambling post-sexual chatter about 
crystals. And then I lunged for her with 
the salad fork. It was hard work, but 
after a while the singing died out. 

I LET THE PRISON CHAPLAIN COME TO HEAR 

my confession today. I'm not a reli- 
gious guy, but hey. I've seen some pret- 
ty inexplicable things in my life, and 
you want to cover all your bases when 
you're about to go for a lounge on a 
twenty-thousand-volt La-Z-Boy. So I 
figured I'd oink a few sins to make the 
guy feel good, and he could forgive me 
for whatever crimes I'd committed 
against his God, who— and I really 
can't wait to see for myself if I'm right 
on this — is probably an enormous, 
omniscient Idaho baker. 

As I shoved down my last forkful 
of lobster, he came in, looked at my 
plate, and offered to wait outside. "I 
don't want to interrupt your last meal," 
he said. 

"That's all right. Padre. I'm fin- 
ished," I said. 

The priest nodded toward my 
leftovers almost reverently. 'Are you 
sure? You haven't even touched your 
potatoes." ■ 




CUTTING 


TZ QUIZ by Margaret Mayo McGlynn 



I n this issue's special section on screenwriter Charles Beaumont and his talented colleagues (beginning on page 
42), we've offered you a little slice of Hollywood synergy from the years of the first Twilight Zone TV show. 

We wanted to give you a behind-the-scenes look at the magic that can sometimes happen when talented people 
collaborate and one great creative mind makes others catch fire. Beaumont was the kind of man who could act 
as both mentor and muse. 

Rod Serling also made a point of nurturing talent. And, as you probably know, many of the creative people who 
worked on The Twilight Zone and Rod Serling's Night Gallery went on to make their own films and TV shows. So, in 
keeping with this issue's theme we present this "Cutting Room" match-up quiz. 

In recent quizzes, we've focused on the performers who brought TZ and Night Gallery to life. Here we give you the 
opportunity to test your knowledge of the people working behind the cameras — writers, directors, and producers. Each 
pair of titles listed to the left is the work of a single talent. The first title in each pair is a Twilight Zone or Night Gallery 
episode; the second, another film or television project. See if you can link each pair with its appropriate writer, director, 
or producer. But wait, there's more! 

I've built into this quiz a "back door" for the visually minded (or the trivially handicapped, like me). See the weird- 
looking strip next to the names at right? You can cut out the list and separate the names along the white lines. Those of 
you who want to save the magazine intact (bless your hearts) can copy this page or trace it. If you can put the design in 
order so that it spells out the answer to our final bonus question, you'll have the answers to the whole quiz. So go 
ahead, grab your scissors, and prove you're a cut above the rest! 


PROJECTS 

1. "Nick of Time" (TZ) 

The Queen of Outer Space (film) 

2. "The Boy Who Predicted 
Earthquakes" ( NG ) 

Blue Thunder (film) 

3. "A Game of Pool" (TZ) 

Wanted, Dead or Alive (TV series) 

4. "Miniature" (TZ) 

The Intruder (film) 

5. "The Mirror" (TZ) 

"The Arena" (TV episode for 
Studio One ) 

6. "Logoda's Heads" (NG) 

The House That Dripped Blood 
(film) 

7. "Cavender is Coming" (TZ) 

Curse of the Cat People (film) 

8. "From Agnes With Love" (TZ) 
Scrooged (film) 

9. "The Housekeeper" (NG) 

Ice Station Zebra (film) 

10. "The Little Black Bag" (NG) 

Close Encounters of the Third Kind 
(film) 

11. "Eyes" (NG) 

Jaws (film) 

12. "Midnight Never Ends" (NG) 
Supergirl (film) 


PEOPLE 


A. Steven Speilberg, director 


B. Richard Donner, director 


C. Douglas Heyes, screen writer 


D. Jeannot Szwarc, director 


E. John Badham, director/producer 

gr 

F. George Clayton Johnson, 


screenwriter 


G. Joe Alves, art director 



rn^mm MB 

H. Buck Houghton, producer 


I. Robert Bloch, screenwriter 


J. Rod Serling, screenwriter 

u 

K. Charles Beaumont, screenwriter 

"1 

L. Richard Matheson, screenwriter 

UL 


BONUS QUESTION: Name this teleplay 
about boardroom intrigue by a well- 
known TZING writer and producer that 
later became a feature film starring Van 
Heflin and Everett Sloan. 


ANSWERS ON 
PAGE 98 





CHARLES BEAUMONT 

THE CARNINAL 

ILLUSTRATION BY PETER CUNIS 

For a young boy in a small town, a carnival has a special 
kind of magic But for Lars Nielson, trapped in a lifeless 
body, that magic will soon turn dark and strange .... 

The cool October rain and the wind blowing the rain. The green and yellow 
fields melting into gray hills, into gray sky and black clouds. And everywhere, 
the smell of autumn drinking the coolness, the evening coolness gathering in 
leaves and wheat and alfalfa, running down fat brown bark, whispering through 
rich grass to tiny living things. 

The cool rain, glistening on earth and on smooth cement. 

"Come on, Lars, I'll beat you!" 

"Like fun you will!" 

Two boys with fresh wet faces and cold wet hands. 

"Last one there is a sissy!" 

Wild shouts through the stillness and scrambling onto bicycles. A furious 
pedaling through sharp pinpoints of rain, one boy pulling ahead of the other, 
straining up the shining cement, laughing and calling. 

"Just try and catch me now, just try!" 

“Ill catch you all right, you wait!" 

"Last one there is a sissy, last one there is a sissy!" 


?v 

CARNIVAL 

Faster now, flying past the crest of 
the hill, faster down the hill and into 
the blinding rain. Faster, small feet run- 
ning, wheels spinning, along the smooth 
level. Flying, past outdoor signs and 
sleeping cows, faster, past strawberry 
fields and haystacks, little excited blurs 
of bams and houses and silos. 

"Okay, I'm going to beat you. I'm 
going to beat you!" 

A thin voice lost in the wind. 

"I'll get to the trestle 'way before 
you, just watch!" 

Lars Nielson pushed the pedals an- 
grily and strained his young body for- 
ward, gripping the handlebars and sing- 
ing for more speed. He felt the rain 
whipping through his hair and into his 
ears and he screamed happily. 

He closed his eyes and listened to 
his voice, to the slashing wind and to 
the wheels of his bicycle turning in the 
wetness. Whizzing baseballs in his 
head, swooping chicken hawks and 
storm currents racing over beds of light 
leaves. 

He did not hear the small voice 
crying to him, far in the distance. 

"Who's the sissy, who'll be the 
sissy?" Lars Nielson sang to the 
whirling world beside him, and his legs 
pushed harder and harder. 

His eyes were closed, so he did not 
see the face of the frightened man. His 
ears were full, so he did not hear the 
screams and the brakes and all the oth- 
er terrible sounds. The sudden, strange, 
unfamiliar sounds that were soft and 
quiet as those in his mind were loud. 

He pushed his young legs in the 
black darkness, harder, faster, faster. . . . 

The room was mostly blue. In the places 
where it had not chipped and cracked, 
the linoleum flo.or was a deep, quiet 
blue. The walls, specially hand-patterned, 
were a soft greenish blue. And the rows 
of dishes on high display shelves, the 
paint on the cane rockers, the tablecloth. 
Mother's dress. Father's tie — all blue. 


"The Carnival" was left unpublished at 
the time of Beaumont's death. It was to 
have been included in his fourth collec- 
tion, A Touch of the Creature. The 
book was scheduled for release in 
1964, but, after lengthy negotiations. 
Bantam Books dropped it in late 1963. 
"The Carnival," in addition to a num- 
ber of other previously unpublished 
stories, has been included in the recent 
collection Charles Beaumont: Selected 
Stories, edited by Roger Anker (Dark 
Harvest Press. P.O. Box 941, Arlington 
Heights, IL 60006). 


Even the smoke from father's pipe, 
creeping and slithering up into the thick 
air like long blue ghosts of long blue 
snakes. 

Lars sat quietly, watching the blue. 

"Henrik." Mrs. Nielson stopped her 
rocking. 

"Yes, yes?" 

"It is by now nine o'clock." 

Mr. Nielson took a large gold 
watch from his vest pocket. 

"It is, you are right. Lars, it is nine 
o'clock." 

Lars nodded his head. 

"So." Mr. Nielson rose from his 
chair and stretched his arms. “It is time. 
Say good night to your mama." 

"Good night. Mama." 

"Good night." 

"So." 

Mr. Nielson took the wooden bar 
in his big hands and pushed the chair 
gently past the doorway and down the 
hall. With his foot he pushed the door 
open and when they were inside the 
bedroom, he pulled the string which 
turned on the electric light. 

He walked to the front of the chair. 

'Tars, you feel all right now? 
Nothing hurts?" 

"No, Papa. Nothing hurts." 

Mr. Nielson put his hands into his 
pockets and sat on the sideboard of the 
bed. 

"Mama is worried." 

"Mama shouldn't." 

"She did not like for you to be 
mean to the dog." 

"I wasn't mean." 

"You did not play with it. I 
watched, you did not talk to the dog. 
Boys should like dogs and Mama is 
worried. Already she took it away." 

Lars sat silently. 

Tm sorry. Papa." 

"It isn't right, my son, that you 
should do nothing. For your sake I say 
this." 

"Papa, I'm tired." 

"Three years, you do nothing. See, 
look in the mirror, see at how pale you 
are getting. Sick pale, no color." 

Lars looked away from the mirror. 

"I tell you over and over, you must 
read or study or play games." 

"Play games. Papa. . .?" 

Mr. Nielson began to pace about 
the room. 

"Sure, certainly. Games. You can, 
you can make them up. Play them in 
your head. You don't have to run 
around and wave your arms to play 
games!" 

Lars looked down, where the car- 
pet lay thin and unmoving. 

"But you do nothing. All day I 


“ Tomorrow is a 
surprise , Lars. 
Tomorrow you will 
see happiness and 
it will clear your 
head; then you 
will he a man! ” 


work, and hard I work, lifting many 
pounds, and I come home tired. All 
day I use my arms and feet and back 
and I do not want to any more, when I 
come home, so I don't. I sit in the chair 
and read. I read, Lars, and 1 smoke my 
pipe and I talk with Mama. I sit still, 
like you, but I do something!" 

With Mr. Nielson's agitated move- 
ment, the room started to pick at the 
Feeling. Lars concentrated on white. 

'And it don't take my arms and legs 
to do it. They are tired, they are every 
way like yours. I am you at night, Lars. 
And I am old, but I don't sit with noth- 
ing. I am always playing games, in my 
head. I don't move, but I don't worry 
Mama who loves me. I don't move, but 
I don't say nothing to my mama and 
papa, ever, just sit staring!" 

"I'm sorry. Papa." 

"Then begin to think, Lars. When I 
come home at night, let me see you 
talking to Mama, planning things with 
your brain. The big men are big be- 
cause of their brains, my son, not their 
arms and legs. Nothing is wrong with 
your brain, my son, you didn't hurt it. 
You have time to leam, to learn 
anything!" 

"I will begin to think, Papa." 

Mr. Nielson rubbed his hands to- 
gether. They made a rough grating 
sound. 


44 TWILIGHT ZONE 



'All right. Tomorrow you tell 
Mama you are sorry and want to play 
with the dog. She will get it back for 
you, and you should smile and thank 
her and talk to the dog." 

"I— I can go to bed now?" 

"Yes." 

Mr. Nielson leaned forward and 
slid one arm behind Lars's back, anoth- 
er beneath his legs. 

"We are not like others," he said 
slowly. "When I am gone, there will be 
nothing, no money. Don't you see why 
you got to— are you ready?" 

Mr. Nielson lifted Lars from the 
wheelchair and laid him on the bed. He 
sucked on his pipe as he removed shirt, 
trousers, stockings, and shoes and un- 
derwear; grunted slightly as he pulled a 
faded tan nightgown over heavy lengths 
of steel and rubber. 

Then he smiled, broadly. 

"You should say big prayers to- 
night, my son. You have worried Mama, 
but even so, tomorrow is a surprise." 

Lars tried to lift his head. Father 
stood near the bed, but in the comer, 
so the big smiling face was hidden. 

"Tomorrow, Papa?" 

"I tell you nothing now. But you 
are a young man now, nearly, and you 
have promised me that you will begin 
to think. Isn't that what you promised, 
Lars?" 


"Yes." 

"So. And I believe you. No longer 
coming home to see you sitting with no 
thoughts. I believe you and so, tomor- 
row you get your reward. Tomorrow 
you will see happiness and it will clear 
your head; then you will be a man!" 

Lars stopped trying to move his 
head. He closed his eyes so that he 
would not have to stare at the electric 
light bulb. 

"Hah, but I don't tell you. Say big 
prayers, my son. It is going to be good 
for you from now on." 

"I will say my prayers tonight. 
Papa." 

"Good night, now. You sleep." 

"Tell Mama — that I'm sorry." 

Mr. Nielson pulled the greasy 
string and the room became black but 
for the coals in his pipe. 

Lars waited for the door to close 
and Father's footsteps to stop. Then he 
moved his lips, rapidly, quietly, 
fashioning the prayer he had invented. 
To a still, unmoving God, that he could 
stay forever in the motionless room, to 
fight the Feeling. That he could think of 
colors and nothing and keep the Feeling 
— the feet across meadows, the arms 
trembling with heavy pitchforks full of 
hay, all the parts of life — in a small cor- 
ner in a far side of his mind. 

Lars prayed, as Father had suggest- 


ed. His head did not move when sleep 
came at last. 

"You DID NOT TELL HIM, HENRIK?" MRS. 
Nielson rocked back and forth in the blue 
cane chair, breaking green beans into 
small pieces and throwing the pieces into 
an enamel washbasin. 

"No." 

"He never went to one— there never 
was one in Mt. Sinai since I can 
remember." 

"Once when I worked for the fruit 
company it came here, but we were very 
busy and I could not go." 

"Henrik, do you think, will it really 
be good for him?" 

"Good? Mama, you do not know. 
When I went to that one in Snohomish I 
did not have job to work or money. I just 
went to look and I didn't spend anything. 
But there was all the people, everybody 
in the town, and all laughing. Every- 
body, laughing. And so much to see!" 
Mr. Neilson began to chuckle. "Shows 
and machines and good livestock like 
you never saw. And funny, crazy peo- 
ple in a tent. Oh, Mama, when I went 
home I was happy, too. I didn't worry. 
Right after, I got a job and met you!" 

Mrs. Nielson slapped his knees. 

"How many? Twenty years ago, but 
see, see how I remember! Lars will be 
no more like this when he sees all the 
laughing. He will come home like I did. 
But I didn't tell him. He don't know." 

A 'cat scratched at the screen and 
Mrs. Nielson rose to open the door. She 
sniffed the air. 

"Raining." 

Mr. Nielson took up his newspaper. 

"Henrik, he can't go on the rides." 

"So? I went on no rides." 

"What can he do?" 

"Do? He can see all the people 
laughing. And he can see the shows 
and play with the dice—" 

"No!" 

"Mama, he is sixteen, almost a 
man. He will play with the dice, he will 
say, and I will throw them. And he will 
see the frogs jump. And I will take him 
to the tent with the funny people. The 
brain, mama, the brain! That is what 
enjoys the carnival, not arms and legs. 
That is what will make Lars un- 
derstand." 

"Yes, Henrik. We must cheer him 
up. Maybe after, we can bring him the 
dog and he will play with it." 

"Sure, certainly, he will. He will be 
"happy, not alone in this house, feeling 
sorry for himself." 

"Yes." 

"It will start him to think. He will 
think about how to make for himself a 


TWILIGHT ZONE 45 


4 - 

% 

CARNIVAL 

living, like anybody else. And he will 
read books then, you'll see, and find- 
out what he wants to do. With his 
brain!" 

Mrs. Nielson paused before 
speaking. 

"Henrik." 

"Yes?" 

"What can he do, like you say, 
with his brain without arms and legs?" 

"He has arms and legs!" 

'As well not, as well no back, no 
body." 

"Hilda! He must do something, 
something. Look at that blind woman 
who can't hear, like we read in the 
magazines — she did something. Can't 
you see. Mama, can you not under- 
stand? I would take care of Lars, even 
if it is wrong. But you know the rail- 
road will give only enough for you 
when I die, and I am not young. We 
married late. Mama, very late. If Lars 
does nothing, how will he live7 Is it an 
institution for our boy, a home for crip- 
ples where he sees only cripples all day 
long, no sunshine? No happiness? For 
Lars? No! At the carnival tomorrow he 
will see and begin to think. Maybe to 
write, or teach or— something!" 

"But he has not been from the 
house, since—" 

"More reason, more!" 

Mrs. Nielson broke beans loudly. 
Kindling crackled in the big cast-iron 
stove. 

"This blind woman you say about, 
Henrik. She has feet to walk." 

"Lars has eyes to see." 

"This woman has hands to use." 

“Lars has ears to hear, a brain to 
think, a tongue to talk!" 

The cat scratched sharp sounds 
from the linoleum. 

Mrs. Nielson rocked back and 
forth. 

"This woman has money and 
friends. She never saw or heard, she 
cannot remember." 

Mr. Nielson went to the sink and 
drew water from the faucet, into a 
glass. He drank the water quickly. 

"So, then Lars has a heavier cross 
and a greater reward." 

"Yes, Henrik." 

"You will see. Mama, you will see. 
After the carnival, he will know what 
he wants to do. He will begin to think." 

Mrs. Nielson rose and dusted the 
bean fragments from her lap, into the 
wash-basin. She picked up the cat and 
went outside onto the porch. Then she 
returned and snapped the lock in the 
door. 

"Maybe you are right, Henrik. 
Maybe anyway he will like little dogs 


and talk to me. I hope so, I hope so." 

Mr. Nielson wiped his hands on 
the sides of the chair and listened to the 
rain. 

Lars felt his body being pushed by strong 
invisible hands, felt himself toppling 
over like a woolen teddy bear onto 
Father's shoulder. He bit his lip and 
closed his eyes. 

Mr. Nielson laughed, applying the 
brake. 

"There now, the turn too sharp, 
eh, Lars? I will be more careful." 

The car began to move again, 
more slowly, jerking, rattling. Lars 
looked out the windshield at the fields 
and empty green meadows. 

"Papa, is it far?" 

"Hah, you are anxious! No, it is 
not far. Maybe five miles, right over the 
bridge." 

"Will we have to stay long?" 

Mr. Nielson frowned. 

"I told Mama we would be back 
before dark. Don't you want to go, af- 
ter what I told you, after what you 
said?" 

Two children playing in a yard 
went by slowly. 

"Don't you want to go, Lars?" 

"Yes, Papa. I want to." 

"Good. You don't know. You never 
saw anything like a carnival, never." 

Lars closed his mouth and thought 
of colors. The children touched his 
mind and he thought of the blue dishes 
in his home. He opened his eyes, saw 
the pale road and thought of black 
nothing. Wind came through the open 
windows, tossing his brown hair and 
clawing gently at his face and he thought 
of the liquid green in a cat's eyes. 

Mr. Nielson hummed notes from 
an old song, increasing pressure on the 
accelerator cautiously. Soon the road 
became a white highway and other cars 
went whistling by. Signboards ap- 
peared, houses, roadside cafes, gasoline 
stations and little wooden stands full of 
ripe fruit. 

And then, people. People walking 
and leaning and playing ball and some 
merely sitting. Everything, whirling by 
now in tiny glimpses. 

Lars tried to force his eyes shut, 
but could not. He looked. He looked at 
everything and pressed his tongue 
against his teeth so the Feeling would 
stay small in his mind. But the 
meadows were yards now, and they 
were no longer quiet. They moved like 
everything in them moved. 

And the people in the automobiles, 
laughing and honking and resting their 
elbows out the windows. 


When he saw the girl on the bicy- 
cle, Lars managed to pull his eyelids 
down. 

"Oh, such a beautiful day, Lars! 
Everyone is going to the carnival. See 
them!" 

"Yes, Papa." 

The car turned a comer. 

"Different than all alone in a cold 
room, eh, my son? But, see — there, 
there it is! Oh, it's big, like when I 
went. Look, Lars, this you have never 
seen!" 

Lars looked when his eyes had 
stopped burning. 

First, there were the cars. Thou- 
sands and millions of cars parked in 
lots and on the sides of the highway 
and wherever there was room, in yards, 
gasoline stations, the airfield. And then 
there were the people. So many people, 
more than there could be in the world! 
Like ants on a hill, scrambling, walk- 
ing, moving. Everywhere, cars and 
people. 

And beyond, the tents. 

"Oh, Mama should have come, she 
should have come. Such a sight!" 

The old car moved like a giant lob- 
ster, poking into holes that were too 
small for it, pulling out from the holes, 
seeking others, Finally, beneath a big 
tree in a yard, stopping. 

Mr. Nielson smiled, opened the 
back door and pulled the wheelchair 
from the half-seat. He lifted Lars and 
put him in the chair and stood for a 
moment breathing the air and tasting 
the sounds. 

"Just like before, only even better! 
You will enjoy yourself!" 

Lars tried to feel every rock be- 
neath the wheels and every blade of 
grass. He turned his eyes down as far as 
he could, to see the earth, but he saw 
his body. The sounds grew louder and 
as he glided on the smoothness he be- 
gan to see beyond the crawling, moving 
people. It all grew louder and Father's 
voice faster so Lars cut off the Feeling 
and returned to the bottom of the 
ocean. 

The hard-rubber wheels turned 
softly on nothingness. . . . 

Heyheyheyhey how about you, Mister? 
Try your luck, test your skill, only ten 
cents for three balls. . . . Now I'll count 
to five, ladies and gentlemen, and if one 
of you picks the right shell, you win a 
Kewpie Doll. . . . All right, sir, your 
weight is one-fifty-three, am I right?. . . . 
Right this way, folks, see the wonders 
of the Deep, the dangerous shark and 
Lulu the Octupus. . . . The Whirlagig, 
guaranteed to scare the yell out of 


46 TWILIGHT ZONE 



The candy and the peanuts 
and the little dirty faces. The 
rides and the planes and the 
exhibits and the penny 
arcades. The stale, excited 
odors and the screaming 
voices. And the movement, 
the jerking, zooming, 
swooping, leaning, pushing, 
running movement .... 


you .... Fun, Thrills, and Excitement, 
only twenty-five cents on the Flying 
Saucer. . . . Fresh cotton candy. . . . 
Spooktown, Spooktown, ghosts and 
dragons and lots of fun, ten cents for 
adults, a nickel for the kiddies. . . . 
How about you. Mister?. . . . 

Lars kept his eyes still, but the 
Feeling was there. It was small at first 
and he could think yet of colors and 
beds that did not move. But it was 
growing, in the shape of baseballs and 
bicycles and gigantic leaps, it was 
growing. 

Mr. Nielson took his eyes from the 
iron machine and turned the crank until 
it clicked. The sign read Secrets of the 
Harem and Mr. Nielson sighed. 

He put the huge ball of pink vapor 
to Lars's mouth and Lars put his tongue 
about the gritty sweet. 

'Ah, ah, ah. You are happy, I can 
see, already! What shall we do now? 
The fish, we will look at the fish!" 

Peculiar gray creatures swimming 
in dirty water in a big glass tank. 

"Now you wait here for Papa." 

Father stuffed into a small box and 
the box falling fast down a thin track, 
then up and later down again. Screams 
and laughter and movement. Movement. 

"Watch, you see, I'll break the 
balloon!" 

Pop! And a plaster doll covered 
with silver dust and blue paint. 

Inside for the thrill show of the 
century, ladies and genetlemen, see Par- 
mo the Strong Man lift ten times his 
own weight. . . . 

A man with a large stomach and 
moving muscles, pulling a bar with a 
black ball at either end, hoisting the 
bar, holding it above his head. Laughs 
and cheers. 

Yahyahyahyah! See her now, folks, 
the most gorgeous, the most beautiful, 
the most (ahem!) shapely little lass this 
side of Broadway, Egyptian Nellie, she's 
got curves on her yahyahyahyah .... 

"Lars, you wait— no, you don't. It 
wouldn't be right." 

The candy and the peanuts and the 
little dirty faces. The rides and the 
planes and the exhibits and the penny 
arcades. The stale, excited odors and 
the screaming voices. And the move- 
ment, the jerking, zooming, swooping, 
leaning, pushing, running movement. 

Last one there is a sissy, last one 
there is a sissy. . . . 

"Good, good, good. Mama should 
be here! But now we must eat." 

An open arena, with fluffballs of 
red and yellow and green hanging from 
the ceiling. On the floor, popcorn and 
peanut shells and wadded dirt. 

CONTINUED ON PAGE 74 


TWILIGHT ZONE 47 





T he year is 1960. And if you 
should wander into one of 
Los Angeles's coffee shops 
during the late hours of the 
night, you just might see a group of 
young men, chain-smoking and drinking 
black coffee, talking animatedly into 
the early hours of the morning about life 
and their art. Chances are, they won't 
notice you — or anyone else. 

They might be working on a televi- 
sion script, or a magazine essay, or dis- 
cussing whether the girl in the short 
story on the table before them would 
really cry like that. One of them, the 
slim young man with the sandy blond 
hair, may be leaning over a white writ- 
ing pad, his black bail-point pen mov- 
ing across it with swift, dark strokes, as 
the others watch him with total concen- 
tration. 

The man's name is Charles Beau- 
mont. And this coffee shop is, in a very 
real sense, a part of the Twilight Zone. 

Beaumont, and the other writers 
who gather here, including George 
Clayton Johnson, William F. Nolan, John 
Tomerlin, and Jerry Sohl, will soon 
make a major contribution to The Twi- 
light Zone's enduring magic, creating 
such classic episodes as "Perchance to 
Dream," "Nothing in the Dark," "Living 
Doll," and "Number Twelve Looks Just 


Like You." But the influence of these 
late-night sessions extends far beyond 
one television program. 

Along with Richard Matheson, 
Chad Oliver, Ray Russell, and the 
group's early mentor, Ray Bradbury, 
these writers are part of what Los An- 
geles Times critic Robert Kirsch calls 
"The Southern California School of 
Writers"— a remarkable confluence of 
talent that produced an astonishing 
body of work in print and on screen. 
Beaumont and his circle had a pro- 
found effect on the development of fan- 
tastic film and fiction in the decades 
that followed. 

Tall, lean, and bespectacled, Charles 
Beaumont was always full of a thou- 
sand ideas and a thousand projects, 
and approached them all with fantastic 
energy. By 1960, he was already an es- 
tablished writer. He'd published dozens 
of short stories and essays, and several 
books, sold a number of screenplays to 
such shows as Alfred Hitchcock 
Presents, Naked City, Thriller, and 
Wanted: Dead or Alive. And when Rod 
Serling's Twilight Zone made its net- 
work debut in 1959, Beaumont became 
one of its principal writers, scripting 
over twenty of its one hundred fifty-six 
episodes. He was often so busy he 
would enlist the help of his friends to 


A LOOK BACK AT THE 
BRILLIANT WRITER 
WHO BROUGHT A 
SPECIAL MAGIC TO 
THE TWILIGHT ZONE 
AND INSPIRED A 
GENERATION OF 
TALENTED YOUNG 
SCREENWRITERS. 


Special thanks are due to Christopher 
Beaumont and William F. Nolan for the use 
I of photographs from their collections in 
I conjunction with this article. 

RANKER 


ARTICLE BY ROGE 


TWILIGHT ZONE 49 




IT 



Beaumont 


George Clayton Johnson: 

BEING TAKEN TO THE BEACH 

"We had this business we called 'being 
taken to the beach.' It worked best 
when there were about four of us. I 
remember once, on the way back 
from a road racing trip. Chuck and 
Helen Beaumont, John and Wilma 
Tomerlin, Bill Nolan and myself were 
talking and we got into an analytical 
mood where we were discussing 
somebody's flaws. And Helen stopped 
us at it and said that it was like being 
taken to the beach for the purpose of 
being drowned. After that we started 
referring to it as 'being taken to the 
beach.' You'd be warned: 'We're going 
out. We've all decided we're taking 
you to the beach, George.' And I'd 
say, 'Yeah, okay. Fine.' And you'd 
spend four or five hours driving up 
and down the beach or through town 
or wherever, while three guys told 
you what was wrong with you. But 
you have to understand, we weren't 
setting out with an objective to 
destroy; we were setting out with an 
objective to heal. 


"Around this time, I was having 
some strong opinions about fiction 
and television and what art was 
about. And John Tomerlin was writ- 
ing for the Lawman series and Beau- 
mont was writing for Twilight Zone 
and Have Cun, Will Travel and some 
other shows, and I'd sold only a cou- 
ple of short stories. So Chuck said, 
It's all right for you to have all these 
high-flown literary opinions about 
what's good and what isn't and put us 
down for being whores in the video 
business, but then you've got to prove 
that you can do it better, show us 
what you're talking about here or we 
can't take you seriously.' 

"I went home and started writing 
that night. Within a week or two, I 
was selling 'A Penny for Ypur 
Thoughts' to Twilight Zone. Nothing 
would have galvanized me to do it, 
except that Beaumont finally stopped 
treating me as though I really were 
wise and said, 'George, after all, you 
haven't done it.' He softened it, but 
ultimately it's: Hey, man, put your 
money where your mouth is.' That 
really proved to be the turning point 
in my career." 


complete the assignments. 

So those late-night coffee shop 
meetings were more than just social 
gatherings. They were part business 
meeting, part brainstorming session, 
part writing workshop, and part group 
therapy session. 

"We were a group of young men 
who were interested in talking to each 
other," recalls George Clayton Johnson, 
"in deep sincerity and emotionalism, 
about God-knows-what: How to write 
a story, how to get ahead, arguing the 
merits of various racing drivers or com- 
posers, arguing about an old movie, 
telling each other our story ideas or 
reading our stories out loud. And a lot 
of it was just simple conversation." 

In many ways, Charles Beaumont 
was the group's focal point, its "electric 
center." 

"Chuck was like the hub of a wheel," 
explains William F. Nolan, one of Beau- 
mont's earliest friends. "And you had all 
these different spokes going out: Richard 
Matheson, John Tomerlin, George Clay- 
ton Johnson, Chad Oliver, Ray Russell, 
Rod Serling, Frank Robinson, Harlan 
Ellison, myself. Spokes. All connected 
to Beaumont. He energized us. Fired us. 
Made us stretch our creative and writ- 
ing muscles. He was always encourag- 
ing us to do better. It was a very 
stimulating period in our lives." 

Won Over by Writing 
The man who would become known as 
Charles Beaumont was bom Charles 
Leroy Nutt in Chicago on January 2, 
1929, and grew up on that city's North 
Side. Of his early childhood, he wrote, 
"Football, baseball, and dime-store 
cookie thefts filled my early world, to 
the exclusion of Aesop, the Brothers 
Grimm, Dr. Doolittle, and even Bull- 
finch. The installation by my parents of 
library wallpaper' in the house ('A 
room-full of books for only seventy cents 
a yard!') convinced me that literature 
was on the way out anyway, so I lived 
in illiterate contentment until laid low 
by spinal meningitis. This forced me to 
less strenuous forms of entertainment. I 
discovered Oz; then Burroughs; then 
Poe — and the jig was up. Have been 
reading ever since, feeling no pain." 

An only child, young Charlie Nutt 
was very sensitive about his name. He 
once expressed to boyhood acquain- 
tance Frank M. Robinson his hatred for 
the continuous teasing he'd endured: 
"The kids in school would ask 'Is your 
father some kind of a nutT" He later 
changed his name to McNutt, but when 
that didn't satisfy the situation, he 
changed it finally, legally, to Beaumont. 


50 TWILIGHT ZONE 


At age twelve, midway through his 
two-year bout with meningitis, Beau- 
mont's parents sent him to what they 
considered to be a better climate. It was 
not a normal living situation for a 
young boy. "I lived with five widowed 
aunts who ran a rooming house near a 
train depot in, the state of Washington," 
he told the San Diego Union. "Each 
night we had the ritual of gathering 
around the stove and there I'd hear the 
stories about the strange deaths of their 
husbands." Beaumont's early illness, 
and that long period of childhood isola- 
tion, contributed to the macabre flavor 
of his later work. 

During this time, Beaumont also 
published his own fan magazine, Uto- 
pia, and soon became an avid fan of 
science fiction, writing letters to almost 
every magazine of the genre. 

In an interview, Beaumont described 
his early adulthood this way: "Studied 
piano for six years, decided [I] couldn't 
squeak by owing to immensely talented 
right hand and nowhere left. Joined Army 
before graduating high school, left 
Army sadder, wiser. Took up art, illus- 
trated magazines, did cartoons, decided 
I was great faker but lousy artist, gave 
it up. Tried acting, star ascended like 
lead dirigible. Quit acting. Got mar- 
ried. Attempted short story, sold it, did 
another, got it rejected, did another — 
finally found what I had been looking 
for. Have been writing [ever since], no 
intention of quitting." 

A Passion for Words 
In the summer of 1946, Beaumont met 
twenty-six-year-old Ray Bradbury in a 
Los Angeles book store and began talk- 
ing about his comic collection. Out of 
that beginning, a friendship blossomed. 
Bradbury began to read Beaumont's 
stories and quickly became a major in- 
fluence. "When I read the first one, I 
said, 'Yes. Very definitely. You are a 
writer', " recalls Bradbury. "It showed 
immediately. Chuck's talent was obvi- 
ous from that very first story." 

As Beaumont's early writing brought 
him little more than rejection slips, he 
worked at a number of odd jobs. While 
working briefly as a railroad clerk in 
Mobile, Alabama, Beaumont met Helen 
Broun. They were married soon after- 
ward, and their first child, Christopher 
was bom in 1950. 

It was while Beaumont was work- 
ing as a tracing clerk for California 
Motor Express that he met John Tomer- 
lin. When the two discovered they 
shared a passion for words (as well as a 
skill for getting out of work), they 
quickly cultivated what was to become 




, : S % L# I 

Group” in the early 1950s. Left to right: 
Chad Oliver, Beaumont (with bottles), Richard 
Matheson, and William F. Nolan . 


a lifelong friendship. 

In 1951, Beaumont made another 
special friendship when he met the 
young struggling writer Richard Mathe- 
son. As their careers grew, the two act- 
ed as spurs to one another. "He and 
I — in a very nice way, of course— were 
very competitive," says Matheson (who, 
in addition to many screenplays, tele- 


during the early Fifties, but meeting 
with little success. Ray Bradbury 
recalls: "I was at Universal in 1952 on 
my very first screen project. It Came 
From Outer Space, and Chuck, coin- 
cidentally, was working there in the 
music department, handling a multilith 
machine, copying the musical scores. I 
would see him and have lunch with 


plays, and short stories, is known for him there at the studio and encourage 
works such as I Am Legend and The him. Tlyse were hard years for him; he 
Shrinking Man). 'At first, I was a little 


ahead of him in sales. But he caught up 
to me." 

By the time The Twilight Zone 


Robert Kirsch: 

A CALIFORNIA OF THE MIND 


debuted, Beaumont and Matheson had 
firmly established themselves in both 
television and prose, having produced a 
prodigious and varied body of imagina- 
tive, skillfully written and — perhaps 
most important— experimental stories. 
Yet, as close as Beaumont and Mathe- 
son were as friends and writers, their 
personalities could not have been more 
different. Beaumont's stories often re- 
flect his interests and concerns: speed 
and racing, jazz and music, the dark 
side of character, the bite of satire. 
Says Matheson, "Our stories sort of 
showed the way we lived and thought. 
I stayed home a lot. I was a homebody 
and I'm still a homebody. Fortunately, 
the ideas that I've gotten were sort of 
unusual. But then I would immediately 
place them in a home situation. The 
neighborhood situation. Whereas Chuck 
would get these incredible ideas and 
they could take place anywhere and in 
any way. He was much more unlimited 
in his thinking." 


"When I speak of a Southern Califor- 
nia school, I am referring to one 
source of Beaumont's material," says 
Robert Kirsch, the first major critic to 
identify the importance of Beaumont 
and his circle. "A writer, if he has 
identity and authenticity, as Beaumont 
does, is produced by the contrasting 
interaction between a discernible envi- 
ronment and the special, individual 
vision which is his. 

"This discernible area is Southern 
California (of the mind even more 
than geography): new, illusory, ex- 
perimental, the land of sports cars 
and movies, speed and special effects. 
Above all it is the terrain of imagina- 
tion where the writer does not have 
the rooted, haunted past, it is the 
present which provides his sustenance. 

"Perhaps that is why the settled 
East and the decaying South have not 
produced the special quality of fanta- 
sy which is Southern Californian." 


Beaumont was writing feverishly 


TWILIGHT ZONE 51 


Beaumont 


William F. Nolan: terror 

IN THE PARKING LOT 

"One night, after Beaumont and I had 
gone to a late-night horror movie, we 
came out of the Wiltern Theater and 
walked across the street to get into my 
car, which was in the parking lot of 
one of the big stores on Wilshire. 

"We were very hyped up, talking 
about the horror film we'd just seen 
and about other horrors — real-life 
horrors. Chuck was just fascinated 
with that kind of thing. 

"When we got to the parking lot, 
we found that one other car -in this 
entire big lot — was parked right next 
to mine. It was about two in the 
morning. The other car had a figure 
sitting in it, slumped against the 
wheel, and kind of staring. The figure 
was either dead or pretending to be 
dead or was drunk or asleep or was 
just waiting for somebody. We didn't 
know what to make of it. Normally, 
you would just walk up to your car, 
quietly get in and drive away. That's 
what normal people would do. Beau- 
mont began to construct this thing as 
we stood on the sidewalk, looking to- 


ward the lot. 'Okay,' he said, and be- 
gan to count with his fingers. 'The 
man could be, one, a corpse. And if 
he is a corpse, I don't want anything 
to do with it. I don't know about you, 
but I don't.' I said, 'No, no. I don't 
want anything to do with a corpse.' 
'Or, two, he's some kind of madman 
pretending to be asleep and ready to 
go for us the minute we get to that 
door.' I said, 'Well, that's very unlike- 
ly.' Unlikely, yes,' he said. 'But not im- 
possible. Why would he park right 
next to us? The only car in a lot that 
can hold three hundred cars?' I said, 
'That's a good point.' 'Maybe, the guy 
is a normal man who's fallen asleep 
waiting for his wife.' I said, 'That's 
probably the case.' 'Exactly,' he said. 
'But are you willing to risk your life 
on that?' I said, 'No.' So we left the 
car and took a bus home. 

"It would start out tongue-in- 
cheek, but Chuck had a compelling 
ability to convince you of things. He 
had that quiet way of simply laying 
out this scenario that probably we'd 
be fine — except that if we weren't we'd 
be killed. It sounds strange, but you 
just had to know Beaumont, and the 
way he could lay these things out." 



didn't want to be in the music depart- 
ment doing all this 'stupid' work. He 
wanted to write." 

When he was fired from Universal 
in June of 1953, Beaumont took the 
plunge into full-time writing. He was 
twenty-four, married, and had a family 
to support. (They would have four chil- 
dren in all, Chris, Catherine, Elizabeth, 
and Gregory.) 

By late 1953 the Beaumonts were 
in disastrous financial shape. "Chuck's 
typewriter was in hock and the gas had 
been shut off in their apartment," says 
Bill Nolan (co-author of Logan's Run). 
"I remember Beaumont breaking the 
seal and turning it back on; Chris re- 
quired heat, and damn the gas company! 
Chris got what he needed." 

Nolan had met Beaumont briefly, 
in 1952 at Universal, when they were 
introduced by Ray Bradbury. "I recall 
Chuck's sad face and ink-stained hands. 
The first Beaumont story had already 
appeared (in Amazing Stories) and 
within a few more months, when I saw 
him again, half a dozen others had 
been sold. Our friendship was immedi- 
ate and lasting. 1 found, in Chuck, a 
warmth, a vitality, an honesty, and 
depth of character which few possess. 
And, more necessary, a wild, wacky, 
irreverent sense of humor." 

In February 1954, Beaumont and 
Nolan began writing comics for Whit- 
man Publications, where they helped to 
"guide the destinies of such influential 
literary figures as Bugs Bunny, Mickey 
Mouse, Donald Duck, and Andy Panda." 

Finally, in September of that year, 
Beaumont's first major sale, "Black 
Country," appeared in Playboy. Equally 
adept at fiction and non-fiction, Beau- 
mont soon penned a large body of short 
fiction, nostalgic essays, and personali- 
ty profiles for the magazine. Outstand- 
ing among them is the essay "Chaplin," 
which won him their Best Article Award, 
and "Black Country," a ten-thousand- 
word novella about a terminally ill 
jazzman. Ray Russell ( Playboy's editor 
during the 1950s, and author of many 
works of fiction, including Incubus and 
Sardonicus) considers "Black Country" 
the best story Playboy ever bought. 
"Beaumont manages to set up a rhythm 
and sustain a pitch, a concert pitch - to 
use a musical term — and sustain that 
from the very beginning to the very 
end, says Russell. "It almost never 
relaxes. You're on a beat throughout the 
entire story until whhh, it's over. There 
are very few stories that have that, by 
Beaumont or anybody else." 

Playboy soon placed Beaumont on 
a five-hundred -dollar monthly retainer 



for first refusal rights to his manu- 
scripts, and later listed him as a con- 
tributing editor. 

Beaumont had reached the turning 
point in his career. 

The Fast Track 

By the mid-Fifties, Beaumont's stories 
began to appear in the most prestigious 
magazines in the nation, including 
Esquire, Collier's, and The Saturday 
Evening Post. 1954 also marked the be- 
ginning of his career in television when, 
in April, his teleplay "Masquerade" 
aired on Four Star Playhouse. In the 
years to follow, he would write a num- 
ber of scripts, many in collaboration 
with Richard Matheson. "For a year or 
two, we wrote together on all sorts of 
projects: Have Gun Will Travel, Buck- 
skin, Philip Marlowe, The D.A.’s Man. 
Real crap, most of it," says Matheson, 
laughingly. "But it was fun, because we 
had never done this before. But eventu- 
ally we decided that we really didn't 
need to collaborate, and chose to go 
our own ways." 

Beaumont's entry into television, 
coupled with his success at Playboy, 
soon enabled him to participate in what 
was to become a new and exciting hobby 
— auto racing. In February 1955, Beau- 
mont and Nolan attended their first 
sports car race and the sport instantly 
became one of the great fascinations of 


their lives— a fascination that quickly 
included John Tomerlin as well. 

The trio could soon be found at- 
tending and competing in weekend rac- 
ing events on the West Coast, and writ- 
ing voluminously for motoring journals 
such as Road & Track and Sports Car 
Illustrated. (Beaumont and Nolan also 
edited two thick books on the subject. 
Omnibus of Speed and When Engines 
Roar.) 

Of their racing abilities, Nolan says: 
"We weren't great, by any means, but 
we were fairly good, fairly fast, and to- 
tally crazy— which means we weren't 
afraid of anything." 

Beaumont's first short fiction col- 
lection, The Hunger and Other Stories 
(G.R Putnam's Sons) was released in 
April of 1957 to favorable reviews. 
Other collections soon followed, in- 
cluding, Yonder: Stories of Fantasy and 
Science Fiction (Bantam, 1958) and 
Night Ride and Other Journeys (Ban- 
tam, 1960). 

Though he employed many writing 
styles, the distinct Beaumont "signature" 
was always in evidence. "His writing 
was brisk and very terse," says Bradbury. 
"There's a great similarity to John Col- 
lier. Collier rubbed off on him, just as 
Collier rubbed off on me. And it was 
all to the good: good, short, to the 
point, imaginative storytelling. A lot of 
us are Collier's indirect sons, but you 


learn, as the years pass, to shake the in- 
fluence. But it's certainly there. I also 
see carry-overs from my work in Chuck. 
It's inevitable, because we were around 
each other so much. I told him about 
Eudora Welty and Katherine Anne Por- 
ter. I think that also shows. And it's all 
to the good." 

Into the Twilight Zone 

By 1958, Beaumont had gotten screen- 
writing credits on a number of televi- 
sion series. But it was on a project uni- 
quely suited to his fantastic imagination 
that Beaumont would achieve his 
widest recognition. 

Although television had proved it- 
self capable of producing distinguished, 
high-quality drama on such anthology 
programs as Kraft Television Theater 
and Playhouse 90, most network 
programming was an endless string of 
westerns, situation comedies, and police 
dramas. But in 1959, Rod Serling, who 
had written Emmy-winning teleplays 
for those anthology series, announced 
that he was going to create a new kind 
of television series —The Twilight Zone. 

"This is something I've wanted to 
do for years," said Serling in an inter- 
view at the time. "Television hasn't 
touched it yet. Sure, there have been 
science fiction and fantasy shows be- 
fore, but most of them were involved 
with gadgets or leprechauns. The Twi- 

CONTINUED ON PAGE 76 


TWILIGHT ZONE 53 


YOUR THREE 
MINUTES 
ARE 
UP 


■ BY GEORGE CLAYTON JOHNSON ■ 

I have become increasingly aware of the briefness of life. 

Sitting here in this improvised workroom in my little home in Pacoima, late at night after the 
family has gone to bed, touching this battered portable, I remember only yesterday when the 
typewriter was new and I wanted so desperately to be a published writer of short stories like my 
friend Charles Beaumont. It was like a crazy need. 

Writing is a lonely business. 

It tends to make you reclusive. Because it is difficult to concentrate, to get lost in the work 
while others are around, more and more you seek a place to be alone. 

When I used to hang around with the Group, learning to be a writer, little did I know that I 
would spend so many solitary hours at night dreaming. 

God knows, I'd rather be down the hall in the bedroom cuddled up with Lola than here in 
the workroom trying to build a story so that Lola and I can earn the money necessary to keep 
the bills paid, to feed us and allow us to be together. 

Even after all these years we are still best friends who can't be in the same room without 
plunging into earnest conversation, with both of us talking as fast as we can. Only a closed door 
stops the avalanche of eager words that continually pass between us. I've taken to working late at 
night, after she has gone to bed and the world has quieted down, alone in what was once a 
spare bedroom, trying to fit together just those words on paper that might excite an editor and 
eventually bring in the money we need. The only way to survive is to write stories that sell. 

Which is why I was in my workroom at three in the morning, lost in language, when the 
telephone rang. 

I grabbed it to keep it from waking Lola, aware of the lateness of the hour and apprehensive 
because calls this late often portend trouble. 

"Hello?" I said. 

A woman with a telephone company voice said, "This is the Special Operator. I have a 
person-to-person call for George Clayton Johnson." 

I wondered what kind of trouble it was. "This is George." 

Click-buzz and I heard her saying from farther away, "I have your party on the line, sir. 

One moment . . 

Another click and the woman was gone. Then I heard a voice saying: 

"Hello, George. I thought I might catch you now. I know you like to work at night." 

The voice was warm and familiar. 

It was the voice of Charles Beaumont. ^ 


ILLUSTRATION BY JAMES STONEBRAKER 





I never realized, 
when II was 
hanging around 
with the Group, 
that writers 
spend so many 
solitary hours at 
night dreaming. 
That’s w hat I 
was doing at 
three in the 
morning, when 
the telephone 
rang — 


.JfpMn fjj 




^ /m 



m 

I Mmk 



|Rm 


TWILIGHT ZONE 55 



5 , 

rr 

THREE MINUTES 


“It’s only 
while you’re 
on E^rth 
that you get 
your three 
wishes/’ said 
Beaumont’s 
voice. “If 
you have the 
will to reach 
for them.” 


"I hope I'm not interrupting any- 
thing important. I thought if you 
weren’t too busy we could talk for a 
few minutes." 

I felt the hair go up on my spine. 

Charles Beaumont has been dead 
more than twenty years. 

"Who is this?" I said, suspicious. I 
could feel myself suddenly becoming 
angry. 

"It is I," the familiar voice intoned 
solemnly. "It is only and merely I, but 
let's not waste time. I have a lot of 
questions to ask— firstly, how's the 
Group? Have you seen them lately7" 

My God. Whoever was doing him 
had all Chuck's inflections down pat. 
Abruptly I felt cold, aware of the night. 
I heard the faint tinkle of ice in a glass. 
A thought crossed my mind: Do they 
serve alcohol in Heaven? 

"This isn't funny," I said. "Not at 

all." 

"George," said Beaumont's voice 
with a note of disappointment, "I had 
expected you to be quicker." 

I found myself wanting to prove 
how quick I could be. Beaumont always 
had that effect on me. 

"Okay, Chuck," I said tightly. "I'll 
go along with the gag. So here we are 
in the Twilight Zone. How are things at 
your end? Is it the standard Heaven?" 

"Not exactly," he said. "That's why 
I called." 

Now, I thought, here's where we 
find out what this is all about. "Tell me 
more." 

"The Greater Truth is that one 
man's Heaven is another man's Hell." 

Knowing how much English he 
could put on things, I said, "Give it to 
me with the bark off." 

"It's exactly the way I imagined it 
would be. Everything is perfect. There 
is not a discordant note. There is never 
any waiting and no one disputes any- 
thing I say. Do you see the implica- 
tions?" he asked sharply. 

"I read that a man's reach should 
exceed his grasp, or what's a Heaven 
for?" I said, trying to understand. 

"Exactly," said Beaumont's voice 
somberly, and then, brightening, added, 
"but it's my turn. What about Burt Shon- 
berg? What is his latest stuff like?" 

"He died, Chuck," I said, reminded 
of the brilliant artist whose luminous 
paintings had enlightened us all. 

"Oh. I didn’t know." 

The sound of the words chilled my 
blood. "Chuck, I said. "Burt was one of 
the good guys. Haven't you seen him 
around7" 

"No," he said. 

I sat stunned, thinking. My 


Father's house has many mansions. 

'And the Group7 Are they still 
living?" 

"Yes." 

I could hear relief in his voice. 
And do you still take each other to the 
beach7" 

I remembered those night-long ses- 
sions of naked encounter and mutual 
psychiatry with the four of us jammed 
into Chuck's new Volkswagen. We 
would drive along the seacoast or 
hunch together over steamy coffee cups 
in an all-night diner to thresh out the 
problems of the world while pointing 
out each other's flaws, stripping away 
the falseness. 

For Chuck they were fun, but for 
me those confrontations were often 
nightmares as I defended myself against 
self-satisfied challengers: John, who 
figured out how he should feel before 
becoming emotional, with visions of 
himself as a no-nonsense executive 
with a taste for the finer things in life; 
Bill, who would kid his way out, the 
willing focus of Chuck's jokes who 
never forgot or misplaced anything, 
determined to make a living from writ- 
ing, any kind of writing, happy when 
the heat wasn't on him; and Chuck 
Beaumont, keeping things moving with 
his aggressive manner and willingness 
to go first, somehow knowing that he 
was bulletproof, that he was the master 
of verbal judo who was living a 
charmed life. 

Among us. Chuck was the authori- 
ty on writing. 

He had written The Hunger and 
Other Stories, had already published 
his first hardcover novel, was selling 
regularly to slick magazines like Play- 
boy and was being sent to the studios 
on interviews by his Hollywood agent, 
Malcolm Stewart of the Ingo Preminger 
Agency on Sunset. 

He was a proven success. 

Bill was selling stories and articles 
to the men's magazines. 

John had been taken on by the 
Harold Matson Agency in New York 
and there was talk of a book contract. 

I didn't have an agent. All I had 
sold was an original movie script for 
peanuts and after several years it 
looked as though it would never be 
produced. All of my attempts to write 
short stories had come back again till I 
was blind to their faults. Baffled by the 
problem, I had taken to procrastinating 
while I figured out the secret, studying 
Chuck and the others for clues on how 
the magic act was done. Was it the 
neatly typed pages, typed and re-typed 
to perfection? Was it the charm, the 


56 TWILIGHT ZONE 


personality, the telephone manner? Was 
it connections? Was it luck? 

Chuck insisted it was work, and 
that was echoed by the others. He 
talked a lot about forcing himself to sit 
in the chair. He would put a piece of 
paper in the typer and make himself 
stay there even if the words wouldn't 
come. He said it was the way he got 
that trance state where he forgot him- 
self and became the work. He had 
adopted a schedule and stuck to it, 
which wasn’t my way. That's what I'd 
quit my job to avoid. 

So all too often I'd find myself 


backed into an uncomfortable corner by 
all three of them at once; forced to 
admit that, measured by my progress, I 
could be wrong. 

I was there to learn, wasn't I? 

Somehow it was different when it 
was Chuck who was outflanked. He 
would smile warmly at us and thank us 
for straightening him out while praising 
us for our insights into his self- 
delusions. 

Yes, I remembered those enlighten- 
ing torture sessions we called "being 
taken to the beach." 

"No," I said. "We haven't been to 
the beach in years." 

"Why not?" Chuck's voice sounded 


dismayed. "It appeared to me that you 
liked and admired each other." 

"Sure," I said, "but you were the 
center. You must have known that the 
Group would pull apart without you. 
Oh, not at once. Bill and I wrote a fair- 
ly successful book together but it 
turned out that the big attraction be- 
tween us was you. We spent our time 
together, waiting. 

"You'd lock yourself away, working 
on something while we'd wait for you 
to come out and play. We'd see each 
other from time to time, but the day 
would come when you'd finish the 


script or the story and you'd be back 
again. Then the Group would come 
alive. That was when you, tired of soli- 
tude, would want excitement. The min- 
ute you'd come out of the office of 
yours with the manuscript under your 
arm you'd call one of us on the phone 
and he'd come running, maybe picking 
up somebody on the way. You knew 
how to orchestrate these things so we'd 
all end up at your place to talk and lis- 
ten to the hi-fi or pile into a car and go 
for a drive . . . 

"It was your group. Chuck. With- 
out you to center on, we simply discov- 
ered that we all lived in different 
worlds. When John Donne wrote, "No 


man is an island,' he was mistaken. We 
may share the Earth but each man is a 
universe of his own creation. His 
dreams. His lusts. His needs. Every 
man is a god who has forgotten his 
divinity." 

"Exactly," said the voice of Charles 
Beaumont. "That's why it's so important 
that you call the others. Get them back 
together again. It's only while you're on 
Earth that you get your three wishes — 
if you have the will to reach for them. 
It's magic interacting with the throng. 
There are dangers, of course. It's easy 
to forget yourself and get lost in all the 
exciting activity, to be caught up in the 
world . . . but you must not avoid it, 
either. 

"Call them, George. Get the Group 
together. Don't let them drift out of 
your life. 

"Hug them to you. 

"Cling to them. 

"Pray for them. 

"Cherish them. 

"Didn't you know that if each of us 
lives in his own world, he also lives in 
his own Heaven7 

"It gets very lonely when the 
others aren't around. . .George, hurry. 
There is only so much time. Infinity is 
only a heartbeat long. Eternity is now. 
For God's sake, wake up. . .!" 

There was suddenly a click-buzz 
on the phone and I heard the colorless 
voice of the Special Operator. 

"I'nf sorry to disconnect you, sir, 
but your three minutes are up." 

Far off, away, I thought I heard an 
anguished cry. Then the familiar dial 
tone. 

I fumbled the phone back into the 
cradle and sat there for a moment, 
thinking. 

I could see what he meant about 
there not being enough time. I wanted 
to tell him that though he was right 
about not letting the friendship die, I 
couldn't suddenly stop working and call 
John and Bill. 

If I could simply stop what I'm do- 
ing, the first thing I'd do is go down the 
hall to the bedroom where my wife, 
Lola, lies sleeping. 

Don't you understand. Chuck, it 
isn't only the money to pay the bills? 
There is a Greater Truth. Don't you 
know that when you were alone in 
your office writing those stories, you 
were touching more people more deeply 
with the quality of your mind and 
thoughts than you ever could in a car 
driving along a beach with three guys? 
And don't you see why I couldn't leave 
the workroom until I finished this 
story? ■ 



TWILIGHT ZONE 57 





RICHARD CHRISTIAN MATHESON 

ILLUSTRATION BY JOHN LABBE 


Exhibit A: two 
beautiful people 
frozen forever 
on celluloid. But 
this time the 
camera has 
caught some- 
thing they never 
meant to 
reveal. . . . 


They met at this very strange party in Malibu. 

The house was Moorish design and a heavy industry crowd sat on tubby 
Road To Morocco pillows, danced, snorted, and lied to each other as perfect surf 
supplied a metronome. 

She was an actress, studying at one of the local academies and getting in for 
Equity-waiver auditions. He was. . .she wasn't sure. She asked him and he dropped 
two new cubes into her vodka-tonic and said: 

"I work when I feel inspired." 

They stood by the bar's open glass door, watching the ocean foam, and his 
white scarf was suddenly stolen by night wind, flying into the blackness; a ghostly 
serpent. She stared into his dark eyes, and he touched her cheek, asking if she 
was alone. 

An hour later they walked on the beach, and were soon laughing, celebrating 
having found each other at such a dull party. He was a world traveler named 
Gregory and she liked his sense of humor, though he preferred not to talk about 
himself; still, as they crunched through moist sand, she managed to learn he'd been 
married, loved dogs, and knew the address of every great restaurant in Paris. She 
told him she'd never been to Paris. 

At nine-thirty sharp, a screening of The African Queen began in the plush liv- 
ing room which rose over a mirror tide and she sat beside him, nibbling crackers 
and sharing funny secrets. 

Now and then, during the film, she would peek over at him and he'd smile, 
making her feel pleasingly like a child; like he watched her as a father might, tak- 
ing his little girl to her first movie. As Humphrey Bogart's stomach grumbled and 
Katherine Hepburn glared politely, the two new friends held hands and she looked 
over, aching to touch him; to feel him. 

At two a.m., guests began to yawn and sleepy, stoned-out couples hugged the 
host, saying it was the best party they'd ever been to. He was a tanned studio sul- 
tan and kissed their cheeks and smiled, though it was impossible to tell if he be- 
lieved every word or memorized which faces deceived him. 

That was when Gregory asked to drive her home. She was thrilled, feigned 
reluctance, and said she couldn't impose. But when he threw an arm around her ^ 


TWILIGHT ZONE 59 




They waited for 
the red light te 
signal them, 
made funny faces 
as the machine 
exploded light, 
bleaching them 
morgue white. 


and whispered a joke in her ear, she 
laughed and grabbed her purse. 

They took his Mercedes 500 SL and 
streaked down Pacific Coast Highway, 
listening to Z.Z. Top's Afterburner al- 
bum cranked to a million watts, laughing 
like insane teenagers. The top was down 
and their hair was pulled into Dracula 
tightness by cool winds as the Mercedes 
purred through fog and he reached over, 
pulling her closer. Ahead, they could see 
a fuzzy necklace of lights that stretched 
down the throat of the coastline, fifty 
miles worth, lighting the way. 

"Beautiful," she said, watching the 
wipers arm-wrestle mist. 

He slid his electric window down 
and wind swirled his hair into a tidepool 
as they ran a red light and sped south 
toward her apartment in Brentwood. 

That's when they saw it. 

A traveling carnival. It was stand- 
ing in the parking lot of the Malibu 
Colony Market and their faces were 
awash in pink and green neon as they 
drove in and stared at the huge pendu- 
lum rockets that had screams pouring 
from spinning tips. 

He killed the engine, did some 
lines of blow with her and ran warm 
fingers across her cold face. She touched 
her lips to his salty palm and gently 
tasted it, as a cage full of monkeys 
shrieked in the distance. 

You taste good, she said, words 
carried from her mouth on visible breath, 
like a comic-book character whose 
ideas emerge in a balloon. 

They wandered through the sour 
smells of the carnival, drinking blue 
slush and watching an elephant with 
sad eyes stand on one foot. And when 
they threw Ping-Pong balls into empty 
aquariums, he won her a small goldfish, 
which she accepted like it was a dia- 
mond. She carried it in a baggie and it 
swam and stared at them, dangling in 
her perfectly manicured hand. 

They strolled near a giant ferris 
wheel and were drawn by pulsing bulbs 
that guarded the portal to the Coin 
Arcade. Inside, on a lake of sawdust, 
they had their fortunes told by "Madame 
Destiny" who stared, frozen, until she 
was slipped a token, then came alive, 
mechanical face tensing with worry. 
She told them both to beware of strang- 
ers, then lifted a Mona Lisa smile and 
said evil thoughts couldn't be hidden. 
After more trance sounds, which she 
hummed ominously, the seer became stiff 
again, suddenly dead, eyes closing, paint- 
ed hands lifeless over the chipped crys- 
tal ball. They thanked her with amused 
smiles and walked on, seeing a row of 
photo booths, ratty curtains half- 


drawn. On each was stenciled: Four 
Photos - 50c. 

"I have a little more change," he 
said, sliding fingers into his pants pock- 
et. She said she was game and tapped 
at her goldfish as its features bulged 
curiously. 

They barely fit inside the third 
booth and she told him it reminded her 
of an old Marx Brothers movie she once 
saw where a ridiculous number of peo- 
ple crammed into a tiny stateroom. He 
said he'd never seen that one and worked 
on spinning the piano-type stool higher. 

"You think it wants to have its pic- 
ture taken?" She was staring at the tiny, 
wriggling creature in the baggie and 
puckering her lips, smiling protectively. 

Somehow she and Gregory man- 
aged to finaEy get in position and as 
she sat on his lap, he dropped in two 
coins. They waited for the red light to 
signal them and when it did, they made 
funny faces as the machine buzzed and 
exploded light in their faces, bleaching 
them morgue white. 

The groaning booth recorded their 
four poses in under thirty seconds: one 
with no expression, the second with 
tongues out, the third with crossed eyes 
and crazy smiles, the last with them 
kissing and her holding the fish up 
proudly, as if it were a newborn child. 

When it was done, they laughed 
and freed themselves from the booth, 
waiting outside for the photos. 

But they never came. 

They waited ten minutes. Twenty. 
And finally they walked away impatient- 
ly, passing Madame Destiny and wish- 
ing her a good life. She seemed to move 
in the blinking colors of the arcade, 
head turning slightly inside the glass 
box, eyes flashing dread. 

The two of them bought tickets for 
the House of Mirrors and as they dis- 
appeared into its maze of lawless reflec- 
tions, a small boy eating a chili dog 
walked by the photo booth. He heard a 
developing sound and watched as a nar- 
row strip of photos slipped from the 
booth into a corroded metal catch. 

He took the photos and peered at 
them curiously, biting into his chili dog. 
In the first exposure was an expression- 
less young couple, in the second the 
woman looked scared and the man hos- 
tile. In the third, she looked terrified 
and he had a look of darkening imbal- 
ance. In the last exposure, the man 
looked satisfied while the woman looked 
dead, her throat slit wide, eyes glassy. 

The boy searched for the couple to 
give them the photos, but only found a 
baggie with a dead goldfish in it as he 
stood in the empty lot of the market. ■ 


60 TWILIGHT ZONE 


o 


T 


D 


M 


N S I O N S 



THE 

NEW 


DINOSAURS 


I 'm late for my interview with Dougal Dixon. 

I’d arranged to meet him at New York's venera- 
ble Algonquin Hotel, a place laden with history. I 
step off the elevator, buzz the bell breathlessly. A 
bearded man, younger than I'd expected, opens the door. I 
apologize profusely for my tardiness. He seems surprised. "I 
hadn't noticed the time," he says. 

It fits. To the man perched in the faded chair across from 
me, a few minutes matter no more than the decades of histo- 
ry this grand hotel has witnessed. For Dougal Dixon has a 
passion for dinosaurs. 

"I tend to think of things in terms of millions of years," 
says Dixon, "Tens of millions of years, hundreds of millions 
of years." He is so intrigued by dinosaurs that he has created 
a world in which they never died out and brought it to life 
in a book called The New Dinosaurs, published by Salem 
House. In a series of frighteningly realistic full-color draw- 
ings by a team of artists, he shows us "new" dinosaurs that 
resemble ostriches, giraffes, and even whales, as well as 
dinosaurs that look like nothing that's ever lived on earth. 

"To put it in a science fiction context," says Dixon, "the 
best thing to do is to imagine a parallel universe in which the 
extinction of dinosaurs had not taken place. And if we could 
jump from our universe into that universe, this is what we 
would be looking at." 

Dixon leans forward in his chair, and chuckles quietly 
from time to time during the interview, rubs his chin, then 
leans back in his chair, looking out the window. I get the 
feeling he'd rather be working on his next book, or on one of 
the models for his creatures. Still, he thinks hard about my 
questions, giving them his most carefully considered response. 

Would dinosaurs have evolved intelligence? "Human in- 
telligence as we understand it is only one possible kind of in- 
telligence," says Dixon. "It has yet to prove itself as having 
any long-term advantage for the species. Some of the 
dinosaurs were a lot more 'intelligent' than we give them 
credit for, but it was of the sort that provided a more effi- 
cient hunting style, a means of finding food more easily than 
their competitors." So there are no humanoid dinosaurs in 
The New Dinosaurs. One scans its pages in vain looking for 
a tyrannosaurus riding a Harley or a stegosaur wearing 
homrims and listening to Coltrane. 

Do I detect a bias against humans? 'Animals have always 
been more interesting, to me, than people," he admits. "The 
wildlife we're seeing today isn't a natural ecosytem at all, be- 
cause of the influence humans have on the system. Human 
beings are the joker in the deck." 

But isn't he worried about the state of the planet, and 
our future on it? "I do not belong to any preservation group 
or environmental pressure group or anything like that," says 
Dixon. "Largely it is because I tend to look at things over a 
very long time span. I'm an optimist. If we wipe out some 
species— or even ourselves— what is the result going to be in 
five or ten million years time7 Once we are gone, whatever 
is left will continue to evolve and develop, and take the 
places of things we have wiped out." It's a grand vision. But 
personally. I'm hoping the human race stays in the picture a 
little while longer. ■ 


ARTICLE BY 

JENNIFER STEINHAUER 


TWILIGHT ZONE 61 




The Lord had chosen him 
to destroy the Queen of 
Darkness. Now, at last, 
he'd found her, in the 
heart of the City .... 


FICTION BY 

NANCY 

BAKER 


ILLUSTRATION BY 
VALERIE WARREN 


The posters led him to her. They grew along the axis of the 
city's main streets, planted there by her acolytes. Festooning 
the walls of construction sites, circling lamp posts, tacked 
onto trees, they were the signs he used to trace her paths 
throughout the city. 

At first, he had barely noticed them. He had been too 
intent on hunting down another of the sinners he had vowed 
to eradicate. But when she, too, had played him false, prov- 
ing, despite extensive examination, to be no more than any 
other wicked daughter of Eve, the posters had been waiting. 

He stood before a wall of them now, while the October 
wind chased leaves in circles at his feet. How could he have 
missed the signs? She flaunted them like twisted badges of 
honor; the shock of midnight hair, the eyes black-lined and 
hellishly bright against the corpse-like pallor of her skin. 
Even her name — Lilith. The rejected first wife of Adam, cast 
out of Eden for witchcraft, she had thrown in her lot with 
the Arch-Deceiver. What woman who was not a witch would 
choose such a name? 

They had thought themselves safe, the Daughters of 
Evil. Thought that in a world of televised carnage and sensual 
corruption, they could hide. Who would believe in such ancient 
evil, when modern ones abounded like mushroom clouds? 

But he had not forgotten. He remembered his Lord's in- 
junction. It was written down for all to see, even if none would 
heed it. "Thou Shalt Not Suffer A Witch To Live." 

The command was very clear and, clear of mind and con- 
science, he obeyed it. It was not hard to find the offenders; 
they advertised their presence freely. Fortune-tellers, dancers, 
whores, writers of occult pornography, what were they all 
but manifestations of that one great whore, the first witch? 

So he had obediently tracked them down and submitted 
them to the ancient tests:The needles to search out the devil's 
mark that did not bleed, the racks, the water that would 
purify them in death. That not all confessed to their crimes 
had disturbed him at first, as did the incontrovertible evi- 
dence of innocence the drowned corpses represented. Then he 
realized that they were mere dupes of the greater evil, bound 
to it by their sex, if not by their conscious will. They had 
been set in his path to distract him from his true quarry. 
After that, the confessions did not matter. 

The world, of course, did- not understand. The papers, the 
television, were full of news of his exploits, of how he'd com- 
pletely baffled the police. What did they expect? He was 
about his Lord's business; his Lord would protect him. But 
the words hurt sometimes. Psychopath, maniac, sadist. If 
they only knew the truth, he knew they'd praise him for his ^ 


TWILIGHT ZONE 



1 , 

r 



actions, acknowledge the righteousness 
of his lonely crusade. 

Rapist was the word that hurt the 
most. True, he had fallen, once or twice, 
tempted beyond resistance by the naked, 
bruised body spread out before him. 
But that was their wickedness, not his. 
How could any man resist for long the 
wiles of a witch? He had scourged that 
weakness from himself now, and that 
printed lie at least had stopped. 

Yes, the sin was gone, so he had 
thought. But now, standing before the 
wall emblazoned with her image, he felt 
the traitorous stirring in his groin. There 
could be no doubt now. The weak hu- 
manity in him knew the lure of her 
evil, was rising to point it out, for all to 
see. There could be no clearer sign. 

He began to track her then, through 
the cavernous temples where she held 
her rites. Their very names were infamy 
to him. . .The Cave, The Pariah Club, 
Zone Zero. It cost him to pass through 
those hell-holes untainted. The dark- 
ness, the sleek bodies in black and sil- 
ver, even the thunderous, seducfive rum- 
ble of her music, all had an allure that 
drew him, even though he could see the 
corrupt, rotting features of the damned 
beneath the painted faces and hear the 
laughter of demons in her soaring voice. 

As the nights passed, he learned 
where she lived, what she looked like 
under her mask. It had surprised him at 
first, that the Queen of Darkness would 
look so. . .ordinary. Without the erotic 
allure of her paint, she was no more 
than a passably pretty young woman. 
Then he saw the subtlety of that trap 
and marveled once again at the infinite, 
deceptive power of evil. No one, un- 
masking the witch Lilith, would see the 
danger in those pale features. And so 
would turn away, forgetting that they 
had ever suspected her. 

Night after night, he watched her 
whirl about the stage, a lean black der- 
vish. He listened to her voice wail out 
over the screaming crowds. Her songs 
were blasphemy, as wickedly seductive 
as her lithe body, her black-lipped mouth. 
She sang of shadows, and demon- 
lovers, and the power of darkness. Night 
after night, he followed her home and 
crouched on the fire escape outside her 
window, watching the seemingly inno- 
cent rituals of her life. 

He could have taken her a thou- 
sand times, but some voice inside told 
him the time was not right. This was no 
simple task he had set himself, this de- 
struction of the greatest of Evil's 
whores. When the time came, he would 
know it. 

The posters told him, just as they 


had led him to her. "Special Halloween 
Midnight Show." 

The day of All Hallow's Eve dawned 
cold and gray. He barely noticed; the 
the anticipation that surged through 
him made the world a flame in his eyes. 
All the weeks of waiting and watching 
would come to an end tonight. And so 
would his increasing nervousness, the 
itchy twitch between his shoulder blades 
that made him feel watched, and kept 
him away from her fire escape. Tonight, 
his great duty would be done. What 
would come after that, he did not know, 
but he distantly imagined a rapture that 
would trumpet him to heaven. 

He was in the club early, pushing 
his way closer to the front than he had 
ever dared to go. Tonight he was stronger 
than all her rituals. Tonight, he was 
omnipotent. 

The announcer took the stage at 
midnight, seizing the microphone and 
staring down at the costumed crowd. 
"Good evening," he drawled. "It's Hallow- 
een. Do you know where your soul is?" 

The crowd around him surged and 
howled like the demons whose garb 
they affected. He knew where his soul 
was. He could feel it, bright and hun- 
gry, filling him. "Well, we're going to 
take it. . .we're going to shake it. . .and 
we're going to steal it. Because tonight, 
Zone Zero is proud to present our own 
Queen of Darkness . . . Lilith and the 
Nightwalkers!" 

The lights plunged out and around 
him he heard the crowd screaming her 
name. He was screaming too, he real- 
ized, in challenge. 

The bass rumble began, then the 
heavy heartbeat of the drums, the wail 
of the guitar. Finally, as the music built 
to an ominous crescendo, came her 
voice, caressing the darkness. 

“I’m on the night shift 
Oh, tonight I’m waiting. . .” 

He had not imagined she could be 
more wicked than before— but she was. 
Her eyes burned like amber flames and 
her body coiled and uncoiled on stage 
with savage grace. Her voice was incan- 
descent. It burned along his nerves, 
sapping his strength. He found himself 
swaying and jumping with the tightly- 
packed crowd and when he tried to fight 
it, they seemed to laugh and push him 
closer to the stage. 

He clung to his resolution, to the 
memory of the great responsibility with 
which he had been charged. He chanted 
the sacred instructions under his breath, 
a charm to ward off the pull of her 
voice, her eyes, her body. 

"This song," she said, in a lull in 
the cacophony of sound, "is for some- 


one out there. I know who you are. 1 
know what you want." She stared out 
over the crowd for a moment, then bent 
her dark head and began to sing. 

“You hear her singing, with a 
voice like temptation 
Like the one you hear in your 
guignol dreams 

Painting demons over throbbing 
drums 

She’s stealing souls in the 
steely hum 

And you know, you know what 
she really means. . .” 

She knew, he realized with shock. 
She knew. Knew he was there, knew 
his mission, knew his very soul. The 
thought horrified and revolted him. 
How could she know? Had she been 
toying with him all along, sending out 
her decoys to tempt him, then the pos- 
ters to draw him to her? 

“You see her moving like a ser- 
pent in the garden 
Like the one that leaves the fire 
in your veins 

Just like all the good books say 
Everyone's gonna thank you 
someday 

Cause you know, you know 
they’re all the same. . .” 

He tried to turn, to flee that mock- 
ing, knowing voice, but he could not 
move, hemmed in by the surging crowd. 
Fists pounded the air around him, driv- 
ing him forward. Desperately, he fum- 
bled in his pocket for his knife, anoint- 
ed now with holy water and blessed in 
preparation for the night's work. He 
clung to it like a talisman. 

“As you're pulling down the 
shade 

You can hear her calling 
As you’re reaching for the blade 
You can see her falling 
Just one touch and she'll be 
falling, falling, falling 
Falling for you ...” 

She repealed the last line over and 
over, beckoning, cajoling. She was on 
her knees, calling to him, her voice a 
promise. He felt his body respond again, 
felt the rush of fire along his limbs and 
the heavy heat centering in his groin. 

"No!" he screamed, above the thun- 
der of the music "No!" She could not 
do this to him. He had to make her 
stop. Had to end her evil now, no mat- 
ter what the cost. 

The thin row of people between 
himself and the stage melted away, then 
he was alone, scrambling up into the 
light. In its glare, time seemed to stop. 
He saw her eyes widen in terror, her 
mouth open to scream. There were 
shouts from his right and he half- 


64 TWILIGHT ZONE 




Her songs 
were 

blasphemy, 
as wickedly 
seductive as 
her lithe body, 
her black- 
lipped mouth. 


turned to stare into the black barrels of 
the guns. Distantly, he heard the police- 
men ordering him to freeze. 

Why had she called them? he won- 
dered. This had been between the two 
of them. Didn't she know that the bat- 
tle between good and evil must always 
be fought alone? Betrayed, he turned 
back to face her. 

The first bullet shattered his shoul- 
der, spun him back to take the second 
through his chest. The din in his ears 
faded to a buzz of sound and the lights 


wavered over his head. Dimly, he real- 
ized he was lying down and couldn't re- 
member how he'd gotten there. Where 
was she? He turned his head, his vision 
narrowing, and found her crouched in 
the arms of one of the policemen. 

As the light went out, he thought 
he saw her smile. 

Lilith sat on her bed and stared at the 
red-wrapped bundle in her lap. The 
candles, melted to mere stubs after their 
long duty the night before, cast flicker- 


ing shadows across her face. 

There was a sound from the street. 
Out of habit, she avoided glancing at 
the fire escape outside the shrouded 
window, where the dark figure had 
crouched so many nights. She let a long 
breath sigh out. Living out the routine 
of her life beneath the heavy weight of 
that mad gaze had been more draining 
than she thought, especially after the 
police had finally admitted the suspect- 
ed identity of the voyeur. 

They had managed, even in their 
self-congratulatory triumph, to remember 
to reprimand her for not telling them 
about the song, about her plan to lure 
the killer into their sights. How long 
could you have protected me? she had 
countered. All he had to do was wait. I 
wanted to end it once and for all. 

Lilith shifted in her cross-legged 
stance on the tumbled sheets. She had 
not made the bed that morning, and the 
faint scent of sex hung in the air. It was 
a good thing he hadn't been outside her 
window last night, she thought, narrow 
lips quirking a little. Bedding Lieuten- 
ant Davis had been necessary, but that 
did not mean she had to find it unpleas- 
ant. What had followed had been 
equally necessary and, she reluctantly 
admitted, strangely more exciting. 

Slowly, she unwrapped the red silk, 
one comer at a time. She began to hum, 
faint, lullaby-like tones that seemed the 
antithesis «of the wild violence she con- 
jured up on stage. She drew out, one 
by one, the objects the red flower in 
her lap unfurled to reveal. 

Six bullets, the ones she had taken 
from Davis's gun the night before and 
replaced, after proper ritual, with ones 
she had purchased earlier. One spent 
shell, marked with symbols in red and 
black. 

She stared at the last object for a 
moment. The cotton doll was clumsily 
made, features stitched roughly across 
its face, coarse brown yam for hair. It 
was hard to create one without a pos- 
session of the person it was to repre- 
sent; that was why there had been no 
room for subtlety in either its appear- 
ance or its purpose. The method had 
been crude, but the outcome certain. 
When she put her finger to the bullet 
hole in its chest, bits of charred cotton 
flaked away and clung to her skin. 

She wondered absently what his 
name had been. She'd find out, no 
doubt, when the papers came out the 
next day. Whoever he was, he'd been 
right. Righter than he would ever 
know. 

Singing softly, Lilith rose and head- 
ed for the incinerator shaft. ■ 


TWILIGHT ZONE 65 


Fish Tale s A dream date 
from LINDEMANN’S CATCH. 



►URTESY OF UNIVERSAL TEI 


Part eleve 


"You KNOW WHAT GROWS FROM OLD LADIES' FINGERS?" ASKS CaM- 
eron Mitchell in a crazed voice, staring straight into the cam- 
era. "Old ladies." 

It's January 5, 1972, and Night Gallery is beginning the 
last third of its second season in memorable fashion with a 
little item called "Green Fingers." 

"That's one people talked about for a long time," said 
makeup artist Leonard Engelman, whose job it was to make 
actress Elsa Lanchester look newly grown and uprooted from 
the garden. "I still hear comment about that. For some rea- 
son, that's one that people always seem to remember. 

This episode about a greedy land developer and a little 
old lady who could grow anything in her garden benefited 
from an excellent script adaptation by Rod Serling, the typi- 
cally skilled direction of John Badham, and good perform- 
ances by the two lead stars, particularly acclaimed actress 
Elsa Lanchester, well-known for her role as "The Bride of 
Frankenstein." Badham remembers her as "very wonderful 
and imaginative and very sweet." He also had good words 
for Cameron Mitchell, but says that "he was always worrying 
about this and that and the next thing. He just walked 
around and worried and worried and worried." 

Badham had a few worries of his own. "I remember that 
we were struggling with the budget. We wanted to have this 
big lush garden and things growing all over everywhere." But 
for some reason, the site chosen for the location shoot, says 
z Badham, was "virtually out in the middle of the desert, with 
m three roses and a cabbage plant sticking up— with virtually 
no garden at all." 

Nevertheless, Badham remembers the episode favorably 
— and was pleased, for a very personal reason, that others 
do as well. Shortly after finishing work on the series, he met 
a woman he very much wanted to impress. Without refer- 
ring to particular titles, he mentioned his work on the series. 
"When she found out I had been doing Night Gallery, she 
said, 'Oh! Do you remember the one that had this old wom- 
an whose fingers grew up out of the ground?' " 

Badham and the young lady were eventually married. 


NAME THAT TUNE 

TWO OTHER EPISODES FOLLOWED "GREEN FINGERS" THAT EVENING. 

"The Funeral," the story of a vampire staging a second funer- 
al for himself, featured a script by Richard Matheson and 
two fine comic performances by Werner Klemperer and Joe 
Flynn. It suffered, however, from a curious lack of energy in 
its direction and editing, as well as from too much mugging 
by the supporting actors (including producer Jack Laird in a 
cameo appearance). 

"The Tune In Dan's Cafe," directed by David Rawlins, 
one of Night Gallery's film editors, was a tale of love, betray- 
al, and a haunted jukebox which plays only one particular 
country-western song. Although the show holds the viewer's 
interest, it's all ultimately a little vague. Nevertheless, the 
episode struck a chord with the audience — not the story, but 
the "tune," itself. 

The appropriately twangy melody was composed by 
Night Gallery's musical supervisor Hal Mooney, and the lyr- 
ics were written by one of the script's co-writers, Gerald San- 
ford. "I wrote one little verse to it," says Sanford. "But Jack 
[Laird] said to me, 'Look, this is very good. Why don't you 
write a second verse to it?' I said fine. It took me two 
minutes to write the first verse, and a minute to write the 
second verse." Country-western singer Jerry Wallace was 
then asked to do a quick recording of the song, and "If You 
Leave Me Tonight, III Cry" made its debut on Night Gallery. 

It was an instant hit. "The next day," says Sanford, "peo- 
ple kept calling up [about the song]." Universal saw they had 
a potential money-maker on their hands, so Jerry Wallace 
was flown in from Nashville to re-record the song as a single 
for Universal MCA's Decca Records. 

larticle by 

Kathryn M. Drennan 
& J. Michael Straczynski 

© 1989 Synthetic Worlds, Ltd. 


TWILIGHT ZONE 67 



ROD SERLING’S NIGHT GALLERY 



GREEN FINGERS 


The single entered the country-western charts on July 
15, 1972, and stayed there for seventeen weeks, including 
three weeks at number one. But that wasn't the end of it. 

Currently, the song is still available on two albums, "Jerry 
Wallace's Greatest Hits," and "MCA Records —Thirty Years of 
Hits: 1958-1988." And instrumental versions of the tune have 
been used on such television programs as CHIPS and Knight 
Rider, and in the movie Smokey and the Bandit. 

"I use it constantly," says Gerald, who has gone on to 
write and develop other projects for Universal after leaving 
Night Gallery. "I add it in the background, usually. It brings 
me in about, I don't know, ten thousand dollars a year still. 
Universal uses it all the time. I get a list on its use from all 
over the world." 

THE FLAT MALE 

On January 12, Night Gallery brought its viewers a Serling 
fantasy, a pure horror story, and a Laird dark comedy. 

The comedy was "The Late Mr. Peddington," about a 
woman shopping for her husband's casket in the aftermath of 
his fall from a very high balcony. Producer Laird wrote the 
adaptation from a short story by Frank Sisk called "The Flat 
Male." 

In the original story, the woman asks the undertaker 
about the possibility of purchasing a very wide, very thin 
casket to accommodate a corpse flattened by a fall. That par- 
ticular detail was ultimately cut from the script and the name 
was changed; but when artist Tom Wright was working on 
the painting the episode was still called "The Hat Male." 

"I took 'The Flat Male' literally," recalls Wright. "It was a 
flat drawing, almost like a steamroller had rolled over this 
guy, and you were looking straight down on him lying in the 
road. That was a weird painting." 

Serling seems to have agreed with that assessment for 
the painting and the episode. "Not the most appetizing of 
scenes," he said in his introduction while standing next to the 
painting, "not the pleasantest of stories." 

"The Late Mr. Peddington" is less amusing than Laird in- 


tended it to be, but the direction, and the acting of Kim 
Hunter and Harry Morgan, almost carry it off. 

Morgan was not the first choice for the role of the un- 
dertaker. "They wanted (Sir John] Gielgud for that," says 
director Jeff Corey, "but Gielgud had had a lot of playing 
undertakers. He just thought it was a little too baleful for 
him. But Harry Morgan was lovely in it. 

"I liked doing that one. Like most people I find under- 
taking establishments kind of morbid and captivating. I don't 
like to look at coffins but I look at them anyway. So, I tried 
to get as many coffins as I could. You know undertakers 
generally negotiate with you with the door ajar and [the de- 
ceased] visible in an open casket, and you just want to run 
out of the place. Anything you want, yes. Four limousines? 
You bet.'" 

OF MICE AND MERMAIDS 

The horror tale, 'A Feast of Blood," and the Serling fan- 
tasy, "Lindemann's Catch," were more successful episodes, but 
both suffered in their climactic moments from less-than- 
successful special effects. 

It was the same old problem on both episodes— a limit- 
ed budget and too little time to get things right. 'A Feast Of 
Blood" concerns an odd broach that looks like a strange, 
dead mouse until, by the removal of a pin, it grows into a 
flesh-eating beast. Somehow director Jeannot Szwarc and a 
strong cast featuring Norman Lloyd, Sondra Locke, and Her- 
mione Baddeley make this work pretty well — until the mouse 
grows to the size of a dog and attacks Sondra Locke. 

Although Szwarc does not let the camera linger too long 
on the beast, it is still obvious that the poor actress is wres- 
tling with a large, unmoving stuffed mouse. It takes a few 
moments before the episode can recover from this and re- 
establish its horrific atmosphere for the denouement. 

The original Serling fantasy that evening was "Linde- 
mann's Catch," the dark story of a turn-of-the-century fisher- 
man who catches a mermaid in his net. It is easily the best 
episode of the evening, and overall one of Night Gallery's 
better efforts, thanks in part to the fact that Serling's script 
was not tampered with much by others. Director Jeff Corey, 
working with cinematographer E. Charles Straumer, managed 
to turn the back lot of Universal into an atmospheric, fog- 
laden seaport perfect for the story. And, as usual, Corey 
elicited strong performances from his cast. He recalls that 
Anabel Garth, in particular, acted above and beyond the call 
of duty. 

"That poor girl who played the mermaid," says Corey, 
"was out in the cold at three, four in the morning in the driz- 
zle in the back lot; she got very severe bronchitis after that. 
I felt just terrible. It's a pity she had no lines." 

Creating a character who is a fish from the waist down, 
and a human from the waist up, proved a tricky task for 
makeup artists Leonard Engelman and John Chambers. First 
they had to construct a believable fish tail, and then blend 
the edges of the tail into the actress's skin so that it looked 
like a natural part of her. In this they were quite successful. 

But at the show's climax, the mermaid had to be trans- 
formed into a woman from the waist down, and a fish from 
the waist up. With limited time and money, Engelman and 
Chambers did their best. Corey was extremely unhappy with 
the results. "It just didn't look right," he said. "That's the only 
time I worked on a Night Gallery episode where we had to 
do a retake, because it certainly didn't work the first time, 
and it didn't work the second time. I think technologically 
they're more advanced now. They start the makeup from the 
human face and evolve it into a fish. This seemed like a 


68 TWILIGHT ZONE 



ROD SERLING’S NIGHT GALLERY 


fish laid over [the face]." After the second try, Corey had to 
let it go. "I was hoping for some miraculous intercession be- 
tween the lens and what I saw, but of course, it was just 
dreadful. The lens is absolutely going to pick up what your 
eyes see." Engelman had to agree. "It wasn't one of our 
greatest creations." 

NBC AND A KID FROM YALE 

Not only did Night Gallery's special effects make for crea- 
tive problems but also for network problems. Night Gallery 
associate producer Herbert Wright (no relation to Tom 
Wright) remembers that since NBC was always worried about 
anything being too "horrific," special effects often had to be 
double-checked with network executives. 

"These days they do anything— you can show people's 
brains falling out their eyeball and no one [cares] ," says 
Wright. "But in those days, if you showed a wound that was 
too deep or too bloody or too gory or whatever— nothing 
but a scratch compared to what they're doing on film these 
days — the network would go berserk." 

Of course, gory effects weren't the network's only con- 
cerns— they were terrified of anything that might offend peo- 
ple or confuse them. And, says Wright, since the network ex- 
ecs "inevitably didn't have a clue what we were doing, and 
why we were doing it," they were especially worried about 
Night Gallery. 

"Herb Schlosser, the NBC exec assigned to the series, 
didn’t understand fantasy, didn't understand horror, and was 
totally lost," says Wright. 'And I was the guy who had to go 
over and explain this week's monster or this week's horror 
tale and why a [character] is growing out of the grave. I don't 
know where Herb grew up, but he didn't grow up reading 
Grimm's fairy tales. He must have grown up reading science 
manuals or something, because he was very, very literal 
about the whole thing. 

"It drove Jack and me and Rod Serling up a tree. Rod 
would have to make special calls to explain to Herb when I 
was incapable of convincing him, say, why someone could 
fall in love with a mermaid. Because [Schlosser would say] 
‘There are no mermaids."’ 

Serling, however, was not supposed to be bothered with 
these production problems except as a "court of last resort." 
In general, the job of explaining— and defending— the series 
fell to Wright. "We had violent fights. I several times left the 
network and figured that I'd never work again, because of a 
position that I had to take on behalf of the studio and Jack 
and Rod on some of the shows." 

For all the misery dealing with NBC caused Wright, 
working on Night Gallery was still an exhilarating experience 
for a young man just a few years out of Yale. 

"It was my first actual production job in Hollywood," 
says Wright. "I grew up loving Twilight Zone, and Rod Ser- 
ling was always one of my favorites, so to be able to get on 
Night Gallery as my start was terrific I loved it. It was a 
license to be crazy, and allowed me to work with an extraor- 
dinary range of people in all different phases of production, 
including casting and direction. It's an experience you have 
maybe once in your lifetime." 

One of the reasons Wright got involved in so many 
phases of production was Laird's production style. "He really 
didn't like to talk to people," says Wright. "He would much 
prefer to sit in his office or be in a screening room or behind 
a typewriter. Any time he had to go out and see people, it al- 
ways irritated him. So he would kind of do things from his 
office, and I would be the one sent out to talk to people on 
the set, or go to the network." 



THE FUNERAL 


KEEPING ABREAST OF THE CENSORS 

Convincing Herb Schlosser that a man could fall in love 
with a mermaid proved to be a much easier task for Wright, 
Laird, and Serling than proving to the network Standards & 
Practices people (also known as the network censors) that 
Lindemann’s Catch would not weaken the moral fiber of 
America. 

"It was beautiful," Wright sfeys of the episode. "Very well 
done. But this is about a mermaid, and as we all know, mer- 
maids do not wear size D-cup bras. Mermaids are nude from 
the waist up and fish from the waist down, right? Big prob- 
lem with the network. 'You're not going to show breasts are 
you?' Come on, it was the late Sixties, Hair'd been around — I 
mean, it wasn't like a big deal, but no one has ever shown 
that on television." 

After much discussion with the network, a deal was 
struck. "We should show her breasts only if they were cov- 
ered with her hair down the front," remembers Wright. "So 
we had to carefully lay hair over there and glue it up and 
down her breasts to be able to shoot this show. The network 
guy was down to make sure that these breasts were covered. 

"Comes the day I've got to take the film over there. 
We've got twice the amount of broadcast standards guys we'd 
normally have, and they're all ready to see these breasts, 
and to make sure that America will not be troubled by the 
sight of a nipple or something. About two thirds of the way 
through this thing, all of a sudden 'There it is! There it is!' We 
have to stop [the film] and run it back and forth. And I said, 
'What are you talking about?' And they claim they can see 
[something] just for a flash, when she's being carried. 'There's 
a nipple! We know there's a nipple!' It was the great nipple 
investigation. 

"This went on for two weeks, with us going back and 
forth, to the Moviola, the screening room, and all the way 
up to the top guy at NBC. Turns out it was not her nipple at 
all; it was her elbow. But we had to clip the' shot of the elbow 
for fear that anyone in the audience might think that they'd 
seen a nipple on Night Gallery." ■ 


TWILIGHT ZONE 69 




Show- by- Show Guide 



m wmmt. 

GREEN FINGERS 


GREEN FINGERS 

Teleplay by Rod Serling, from a short story by R. C. Cook. 
Directed by John Badham. 

Cameron Mitchell (Michael J. Saunders), Elsa Lanchester 
(Mrs. Bowen), Michael Bell (Ernest), Harry Hickox (Sheriff), 
Bill Quinn (Doctor), Larry Watson (1st Deputy), Jeff Burton 
(2nd Deputy), George Keymas (Crowley) 

Good evening. Please come in. These little objets d'art that 
you see surrounding me, you won't find in your average art 
museum, because these are unusual paintings and statuary 
that come to life, or death, whatever the case may be. Be- 
cause this is The Night Gallery. 

For the horticulturists amongst you, here's a dandy. A 
lady who plants things, and then steps back and watches 
them grow: roses, rhododendron, tulips, and things never be- 
fore to be found coming out of the ground— just put in. The 
subject of this painting has "Green Fingers." 

The widow Bowen's home is surrounded by an explosion 
of flowers and vegetables and plants of all kinds. It is also 
blocking a new development project by the Saunders Con- 
struction Company. Hence, the arrival —with cigar, limousine 
and assorted plenipotentiaries -of Michael J. Saunders, deter- 
mined to buy the place he describes as "a rinky-dink pimple 
on the arm of progress." 

But this is Mrs. Bowen's home, and not for sale. Her joy 
is her garden. She can plant nearly anything, and it'll grow. 
She indicates a stick of kindling, planted on a whim, and 
now sprouting delicate branches. "I have green fingers, you 
see," she explains. He understands gardens. His mother had a 
garden. But he insists that she sell. She refuses. He leaves, 
but is not finished yet. 

That night, Saunders meets with Crowley, a hireling. He 
tells Crowley to do what he must, but get her off that land. 
Later, ambulances arrive at the Bowen house. The sheriff fol- 
lows a trail of blood to the garden, where a hysterical Bowen 


70 TWILIGHT ZONE 





is working in the garden, in shock, one of her fingers having 
been cut off by Crowley. The finger is nowhere to be found. 
The seventy-seven-year-old widow dies of shock soon 
thereafter. 

Later, Saunders inspects the house that will shortly be 
his. As he stands in the garden, the ground begins to swell. 
He panics, runs for the car, but the driver leaves without 
him. He returns to the garden, and now there is a hole in the 
ground and tracks leading into the house. There he sees Mrs. 
Bowen — but not quite Mrs. Bowen. Roots grow from her 
legs, twigs from her arms. She told him she had green 
fingers, she says. Everything she plants, grows. 

Saunders stumbles out of the house, hair white with 
shock, and half-mad, mutters, "Momma7 Anybody? Wanna 
hear the funniest thing? You know what grows from old la- 
dies' fingers7 Old ladies." 

THE FUNERAL 

Teleplay by Richard Matheson, from his short story. 
Directed by John Meredyth Lucas. 

Joe Flynn (Milton Silkline), Werner Klemperer (Ludwig 
Astor), Harvey Jason (Morrow), Charles Macaulay (Count), 
Jack Laird (Ygor), Lara Lacey (Jenny the Witch), Diana Hale 
(First Vampire), Leonidas D. Ossetynski (Second Vampire), 
Jerry Summers (Bruce the Werewolf) 

Funeral home art, you might call it. Example: this item here. 
The somber silence of shrouds, the gray, unhappy light of a 
sunless dawn, and a horse-drawn casket, very much in keep- 
ing with the motif of this place. The title of the painting, 
"Funeral. " 

Ludwig Astor arrives at Silkline's Cut-Rate Catafalques 
in search of a funeral service. Milton Silkline is more than 
happy to oblige, his motto, "When your loved one lies upon 
that lonely couch of eternal sleep, let Silkline draw the cover- 
let." Astor is touched, and requests their largest room, their 
most expensive coffin, all the trimmings. Cost is no object. 

Then Milton learns that the recipient of the services is 
Astor himself. "I never had a proper going-off. It was all catch 
as catch can, all improvised, nothing, how shall I say. . . 
tasty." He always intended to make up for it. Milton is 
outraged — until Astor leans forward, exposing the fangs of a 
vampire. It's not a joke. He sets a date for the service, a 
week hence. All must be prepared. Then he turns a corner, 
and Milton sees a bat flying out of the building. 

A week later, all is ready. One by one, the guests arrive. 
Vampires, a witch, a werewolf, a ghoul, and Ygor, Astor 's as- 
sistant. Astor tries on the coffin, loves it. All is perfect as the 
Count begins a lofty soliloquy, using words nobody can fol- 
low. The witch complains, gets rowdy as she's told to be 
quiet. Suddenly the werewolf, late for lunch, departs noisily 
through the window. Matters escalate, the witch keeps com- 
plaining, and finally they ask her to leave. This triggers a 
tantrum, and as she throws spells and fireballs around mad- 
ly, Milton faints. 

A week later, the damage repaired, a box arrives con- 
taining a thank-you note from Astor, who apologizes for his 
friends' manners, and hopes the enclosed fee will make up 
for it. The box contains a staggering sum of money. Milton is 
counting it when a Lovecraftian apparition materializes in his 
office. 'A friend recommended you to me," it says. "Cost is of 
no importance." And as the creature's choking atmosphere 
fills the room, Milton reaches for his pen and begins filling 
out the forms. 



THE FUNERAL 


THE TUNE IN DAN’S CAFE 

Teleplay by Gerald Sanford & Garrie Bateson, based on a 
short story by Shamus Frazier. 

Directed by David Rawlins. 

Pernell Roberts (Joe Bellman), Susan Olivier (Kelly Bellman), 
James Nusser (Dan), James Davidson (Roy), Brooke Mills (Red) 

We don't ask you to believe this particular painting— death's 
head hovering over jukebox— but it does point up the all- 
inclusive quality of the occult. Phantom spectres can be 
found not only in haunted houses, but in places youd least 
expect to find them. Places Ifke this. Our painting is called 
"The Tune in Dan's Cafe." 


Joe and Kelly Bellman, returning from a trip designed to 
help salvage their marriage— which doesn't seem to have 
succeeded — stop for late dinner at a little place called Dan's 
Cafe. They find no one inside. While they wait for service, 
Joe tries the jukebox, finding the song that they heard the 
first night they met. Their song. He calls it up — but instead 
of the one he wanted, it begins playing a country song about 
love and betrayal. But the record never gets further than the 
line, "words like love, and truth, and goodness— words like 
'til death. . ." On "'til death" the record skips, repeats, and fi- 
nally stops. 

No matter what song he calls up, the jukebox continues 
to play the same song, which skips at the same place — as we 
suddenly start intercutting with another couple, and unex- 
plained scenes of carnage in the same restaurant. The owner 
of the cafe, Dan, confirms that the jukebox won't play any- 
thing else. He's had it fixed, replaced, had the record removed, 
but still it plays only that. It was their song, he says, as we 
again intercut back in time. The couple: Roy and Red, so 
called because she only wore red dresses. 

Roy has plans, wants to get out of town, and is fiercely 
jealous of Red. She, on the other hand, is open to flirtation 
and talking to strangers. Roy plans a robbery, which he 
thinks will get them enough money to get out of town once 
and for all. Before the robbery, he sees her in a car with an- 
other man, and slaps her. She doesn't like it. 

Later, after the robbery, he's waiting for her at the cafe, 
playing their song, when the police arrive. He's been set 


TWILIGHT ZONE 71 


Mm 



^***^*W*AV^^*NN*^^^V** ROD SERLING'S NIGHT GALLERY 



LINDEMANN’S CATCH 


up — doubtless by Red. He tries to shoot his way out, but a 
hail of bullets riddles the cafe, killing him and shattering the 
jukebox in mid-play. 

Now, in the present, Dan thinks that perhaps the juke- 
box is waiting for her to return, as Roy had been. At that 
moment, the jukebox begins playing the song again. Dis- 
turbed at this, Joe and Kelly leave Dan's cafe. As they get 
into the car, they see another car arrive. A couple emerges: 
a man. . .and a woman in red. Quickly, Joe and Kelly head 
for the road home. 

Meanwhile, behind them, the couple enters the cafe, the 
song continuing oh the jukebox, as suddenly there's a scream 
from inside, and a gunshot. The record skips at " 'til death." 
Then, at last, Dan's Cafe is silent. 


LINDEMANN’S CATCH 

Written by Rod Serling. 

Directed by Jeff Corey. 

Stuart Whitman (Lindemann), Jack Aranson (Nicholas), John 
Alderson (Granger), Harry Townes (Suggs), Jim Boles (Ben- 
net), Ed Bakey (Ollie), Matt Pelto (Phineas), Michael Stan- 
wood (Charlie), Anabel Garth (mermaid) 

Ladies and gentleman, good evening. We offer up hopefully 
salutary, possibly educative, but certainly a few terrifying 
little items in this the mausoleum of the malignant. An art- 
house full of bogeys, elves, pixies, bad fairies, and a few 
daemonic inhabitants, all put together for your pleasure and 
titillation in what we call The Night Gallery. 

Painting number one, having to do with fishermen and 


what they fish for. Or more specifically in this case, a fisher- 
man and what he wasn't fishing for. What appeared in his net 
one afternoon defies logic, reason, and belief. But there it 
was, "Lindemann's Catch.'' 

A stormy, cold. New England night at the turn of the 
century. Suggs, a man who reads cards and tells fortunes 
and offers potions in exchange for drinks, is holding forth in 
a tavern as Lindemann, a fisherman and captain of his own 
small boat, enters in need of a drink and a few hours' peace. 
But Suggs goes to him, despite Lindemann's desire for quiet, 
offering to read his palm or his tea leaves, perhaps whip up 
a little potion. 

Lindemann turns on him, enraged. He doesn't like his 
life, he has to put up with the fog, and the sea, "and that 
leaky ratcatcher of mine," but he doesn't have to put up with 
Suggs. He throws Suggs's cards into a spittoon, and follows 
up by shoving Suggs's face down there, where he says it be- 
longs. Then he strikes Suggs and storms out of the tavern, 
with Suggs calling back that he's an evil man, he can't live, 
can’t love, can't share. 

Lindemann returns to his boat, where his deck hands 
are shocked by what they have found entangled in their net 
with the day's catch: a mermaid. From the waist up, a beauti- 
ful woman; from the waist down, a fish. His first impulse is 
to kill it. It's a monster. But she reaches out to him, speech- 
lessly imploring him, and something in him responds. Others 
from the tavern have gathered around, and an offer is made 
to put it on exhibit, charge admission, split the profits. But 
Lindemann orders everyone to leave. 

Three days pass. Lindemann hasn't put out to sea for 
more catch. The deck hands, restless, try to discuss it with 
Lindemann, but he is preoccupied, waiting for the doctor. 
Upon his arrival, a worried Lindemann explains that she 
won't eat. She's sick. The doctor doesn't know what he can 
do, she's not human. Lindemann disagrees. She's more hu- 
man than most. He speaks with her, after a fashion. Though 
dumb, she makes her needs known to him. 

The doctor examines her but can only conclude that 
she’s been out of the water too long. Her only hope is for 
Lindemann to throw her back. She's not meant to be a com- 
panion to man. Lindemann won't even consider this — he 
keeps her with him because he is lonely, and has at last 
found something he can love. 

When Suggs hears of this, he goes to Lindemann, and, talk- 
ing quickly, offers a solution: a potion that will make a whole 
woman out of her. She'll be walking on two legs by dawn. 

Willing to grasp at any hope, Lindemann gives her the 
potion and goes above to wait. At dawn, he goes back below 
decks to where she lies covered with blankets. He lifts one 
corner of the blanket and sees a pair of perfect feet and legs. 
Ecstatic, he rushes topside, shouting his thanks to Suggs, and 
proclaiming that the mermaid is a woman nowl Met by skep- 
tical stares, Lindemann calls her to come up and show them. 
Slowly, the blanket-covered figure rises, climbs up the steps 
to where Lindemann can see her. And he screams at what he 
sees. 

She emerges onto the deck— revealed now to be a woman 
from the waist down, and fish-like from the waist up. Before the 
horrified onlookers can react, she dives into the water. Hys- 
terical with shock and desperation, Lindemann dives after 
her, disappearing beneath the waters. 

Later, a funeral ceremony is held aboard the boat, a sin- 
gle wreath tossed into the water, and Suggs, unmoved, 
tries to find another customer for his readings, potions, and 
charms. 


72 TWILIGHT ZONE 


ROD SERLING’S NIGHT GALLERY ^^^^^wvwwvwvywyv 


A FEAST OF BLOOD 

Teleplay by Stanford Whitmore, from a short story by Dulcie 
Gray. 

Directed by Jeannot Szwarc 

Sondra Locke (Sheila Gray), Norman Lloyd (Henry Mallory), 
Hermione Baddeley (Mrs. Gray), Patrick O'Hara (Frankie), 
Barry Bernard (Gippo), Cara Burgess (Girl), Gerald S. Peters 
(Chauffeur) 

In the general generic area of costume jewelry, note girl and 
note expression. Obviously a lady much disturbed by what- 
ever little bauble she has recently been the recipient of. Uh — 
said sentence improperly ending on a preposition — but this 
story ending in a much more deadly note than that. We call 
it "A Feast of Blood. " 

Henry Mallory arrives at the Gray home to pick up his 
date for the evening, Sheila, an attractive woman who is 
aware of the effect she has on men. She dates Henry to satis- 
fy her mother's desire that she keep her options open, despite 
her intention to marry someone else. Sheila doesn't much 
like Henry. "He's small and soft and repulsive as a slug." But 
he's a monied slug, so the narcissistic Sheila tolerates him. 

At dinner, Henry presents her with an unusual gift: a 
furred broach that looks like an exotic mouse. It is held tight 
in the broach by a gold pin. It's expensive, but Henry is quite 
successful, despite his homely appearance. What he wants, 
he gets. And what he wants is her. She drops all pretense 
and laughs at his ambitions. She is the one thing he will 
never have. 

He seems unaffected by this, and returns the conversa- 
tion to the broach. It's quite rare. It's a form of mouse, an 
ancestor to the bat. He removes the pin that fastens it to her 
blouse, and it remains, holding on by its prehensile feet, 
almost as though alive. 

She thanks him for the gift, but insists that this is good- 
bye. He drives her home, taking a back road. In the middle 
of nowhere, he stops the car and mocks her for choosing an- 
other man just because he is more handsome. She storms out 
of the car, saying, "I'd rather die than stay with you." It's her 
choice, he says, then drives away. 

As she begins the long walk back to town, the creature, 
free of the pin, moves toward her throat. She pricks her fin- 
ger on it, and realizes that it's moved — too late. It hangs on, 
and attacks, growing as big as a dog. Moments later, one of 
a pair of bicyclists sees something rushing through the night, 
"its head black and shiny, like it was covered with blood." 
Moments later, they find Sheila's body. 

Meanwhile, at a bar, Henry Mallory introduces himself 
to a beautiful woman. She is unimpressed by his homely ap- 
pearance. When he presents her with a broach, identical to 
the other, she accepts it, but explains, "this doesn't mean any- 
thing." He smiles. "Of course. It's just that I am compelled — 
to honor beauty." 

THE LATE MR. PEDDINGTON 

Teleplay by Jack Laird, based on a short story by Frank Sisk. 
Directed by Jeff Corey. 

Harry Morgan (Thaddeus Conway), Kim Hunter (Cora Ped- 
dington), Randy Quaid (John) 

A dead man splattered on a concrete walk. Not the most ap- 
petizing of scenes, not the pleasantest of stories. But, if you're 
interested remotely in homey homicides, this may be your 


bag. We call it "The Late Mr. Peddington. 


Cora Peddington arrives at Conway's funeral parlor, in 
search of an economical undertaker. She's making the rounds 
to try to cut expenses, a need underlined as she rolls her own 
cigarette. 

The recipient is her husband, Adam, a wealthy business- 
man. It was quite sudden, she explains. She'd forgotten to 
mention that repairmen had removed the balcony on their 
penthouse apartment. So one morning he stepped out -and 
down thirty stories. Conway is appalled . . . and confused. If 
Adam was doing well, why the need for her to cut expenses? 
There must be quite an inheritance. 

There is. But Adam never liked rich widows, and felt 
that between death and inheritance a "purgative period 
should ensue." Consequently, she must live only on the insur- 
ance money for two years. The amount: $2,000. With in- 
creases for accidental death, that makes it $4,000 for two 
years. So she goes down the list of options she can afford: no 
reconstruction, no coffin (a basket will do), cremation rather 
than burial .... 

Later, Conway's assistant John asks if they got the job. 
Conway says that no one underbids him. They got it. Then 
why didn't she tell them to collect the body? "She was shop- 
ping, John," Conway says. "Shopping. She had to make cer- 
tain that under the conditions of her husband's will she could 
realistically afford the price of even a cut-rate funeral." So? 
"So, now she has to go home and—" 

And at that moment, Adam Peddington steps out onto 
the balcony that's no longer there, and plummets thirty 
stories to the ground. ■ 



THE LATE MR. PEDDINGTON 


TWILIGHT ZONE 73 


, rv 

CARNIVAL 

CONTINUED FROM PAGE 47 


"It's all right, Lars, it's good meat. 
Maybe not like Mama makes, huh? So. 
Open your mouth." 

The people's eyes, staring, pitying, 
a million eyes, and hums of voices in 
the colored restaurant. Then a kind of 
quiet, like sharp prongs in the Feeling. 
In the little Feeling, coming awake. 

"Now, so? You are finished. No, 
the milk, the milk to make you strong." 

Off out of the arena, back into the 
movement. 

And out into the very heart of the 
shining motion. 

Lars stopped fighting. He let his 
eyes see and his mind fill. 

Last one there is a sissy and Father 
seated in a small car, bumping the car 
into others and howling. First one to 
the trestle and the slow circling ferris 
wheel with the squealing dots. 

Just try and catch me, just try. . . . 

"Come now, Lars, we rest." 

The horror in the washroom and 
out again, feeding the Feeling, sending 
it along the spiral. The music bellowing 
and even in the little car in tfie black- 
ness of the Fun House — movement there. 
Sudden lights on painted monsters, cot- 
ton bats squeaking along invisible wires. 

And then — 

Here we go, folks. The experience of 
a lifetime. Yah yah hear! See 'em all — 
the Frog Man, Queenie the Fat Girl 
(three hundred pounds of feminine love- 
liness!), Marco the Flame-Eater, yah 
yah, all inside, all inside .... 

"Come, Lars, after this we will go. 
But if it is like last time— you never saw 
anything like it. Funny-looking crazy 
people. It's good, good." 

And, as a special attraction, ladies 
and gents, we have Jackie the Basket- 
Case. No arms, no legs, but he writes 
and plays cards and shaves, right before 
your very eyes. Science gave him up as 
lost, but you'll see him now. Jackie, the 
Basket-Case. And the headless girl, who 
defies doctors throughout the universe! 
Nurses in attendance! Heah, heah, heah! 
Only ten cents, the tenth part of a dollar. 

Square canvas flags with strange 
pictures on them. A man with feathers. 
And in front, high on the platform, a 
man with a striped shirt and a cane, 
hitting a pan. 

"So, we go in." 

Lars said nothing. He listened to 
all the sounds and how they seemed 
like the swift rush of cold wind and 
rain across his face. His heart beat and 
his blood pounded against his temples. 

I'll beat you, Lars .... 

Lars felt his chair being pushed 
forward. Out of the sunlight and quick- 
ly into the dimly lighted interior, he 



Lars looked at the 
armless , legless 
man in the cheap 
basket and in one 
explosion, the 
thought sprang 
from the Feeling 
and scattered 
through his brain. 


could see nothing at first. Only what 
he had been seeing for hours. 

There was the sudden quiet, for 
one thing. Nothing to see yet, but like 
dropping from a close, hot hay-loft to 
freshly watered earth. Damp and cool, 
like perhaps a grave. 

The Feeling stopped growing for a 
moment as Lars focused his eyes. He 
wondered where all the people had 
gone, what had happened, if he were 
back in the silent, unmoving room. The 
cold stillness and then the soft mutter- 
ing of voices, strange and out of place. 

"Here, Lars, don't you see?" 

Mr. Nielson ran his hand through 
Lars's hair and touched his shoulder. 
The chair moved over ploughed ground. 

"Papa, what—" 

Mr. Nielson giggled no louder than 
the other people in the tent. 

"Ha, ha! Look, boy, look at the 
woman!" 

Lars saw the object that Father had 
called a woman. The product of mutant 
glands, a huge sitting thing with moun- 
tains of flesh. Flowering from the neck 
down the arms and looping over the el- 
bows, dividing like a baby's skin at the 
hands; the thighs, cascading flesh and 
fat over the legs down to the feet. And 
over all this, a metallic costume with 
purple sequins attached and short black 
hair, cut like a boy's. 

"Have you ever seen anything so 
big, Lars!" 

Lars looked from his wheelchair 
into the eyes of the fat lady and then 
quickly away from them. 

Over the ground. Stopping. 

The sign reading The Frog Man, 
and four people staring. 

"Look! Olihh!" 

Shriveled limbs with life sticking to 
them. Shriveled, dried-up, twisted legs, 
bent grotesquely. And the young man 
with the pimples on his face crouching 
on these legs, leering. Every few mo- 
ments, the legs moving and the small 
body hopping upwards. 

Lars tried to shake his head. The 
Feeling started, from where it had left 
off, but it traveled elsewhere now. It 
traveled from his mind to his eyes and 
from his eyes outward. 

"Come, it will be late. We must see 
everything. Oh, look, have you ever 
seen such a crazy thing!" 

Lars leaned his head forward pain- 
fully and looked. 

The face of a very old man, but 
smooth along the creases and over the 
wrinkles. Wrinkled hands, thin hair. 
An old man standing three feet from 
the ground. But not merely small. Every- 
thing dwarfed. The false beard and the 


74 TWILIGHT ZONE 


gnome's cap and the stretched-gauze 
wings. 

The Feeling went into the eyes of 
the midget. 

"There, over there! There was no 
such last time!" 

Over the ground slowly, past the 
man with the pictures on his skin, the 
black creeping thing, the boy with the 
breasts, slowly past these, slowly so the 
Feeling could be fed and gathered. 

And now, the Feeling reaching across 
the tent to the other side, reaching into 
the woman with seventeen toes, the 
boy with the ugly face, the alligator 
girl, the human chicken, reaching and 
bringing back, nursing, feeding, iden- 
tifying. Identifying. 

Then ceasing. 

"Lars, look. Never was there such 
a thing." 

Mr. Nielson's voice was low and 
full of deep wonder as he craned his 
head over the people's shoulders. 

Lars tried one last time to see the 
blue of the linoleum, the gray of his 
room, all the quiet things his mind had 
made so carefully. But his eyes moved. 

It was large, made of wicker, padded 
and made to look like an egg basket on 
the outside. There was in front of it a 
square card with writing, which gave 
dates and facts, but the card was dirty 
and difficult to read. The thing in the 
basket lay still. 

A knitted garment covered the mid- 
section and lower part. Above, the pale 
flesh stretched over irregular bumps 
and lines, past the smooth arm-sockets 
on up to the finely combed black hair, 
newly barbered. 

The face was handsome and young, 
clean-shaven and delicate. 

When it lifted, Mr. Nielson and the 
other staring people gasped. 

In the mouth was a pencil and with 
this pencil, the thing in the basket be- 
gan to write upon a special pad of pa- 
per. The lead was soft so that those 
nearby could make out the words, which 
were "My name is Jack Rennie. I am 
very happy." 

Lars saw his father's hands about 
his side, lifting and pushing. 

"Look, see what it does!" 

Lars's body trembled, suspended 
above the basket, held in air. Every- 
thing trembled and shook, as teeth held 
a moving pencil and the pencil made 
words. The limbless man thought, it— 
he— thought . . . . 

The automobile came straight at 
Lars, and he saw it now. Saw it speed- 
ing over the trestle for him, bellowing 
its warning. The brakes screeched in his 


head and he saw the car swerve and ca- 
reen in the wet road. And then floating 
down the trestle, below it, onto sharp, 
hard things. 

Lars looked from his wheelchair at 
the armless, legless man in the cheap 
basket and in one explosion, the thoughts 
sprang from the Feeling and scattered 
through his brain, moving, dancing, 
swinging arms, jumping on legs, mov- 
ing, moving with all the ecstasy of a 
dead child brought suddenly to life. 

"It shaves, see, talks, it writes!" 

Lars rode his bicycle in the sunlight 
down through the fields near the river 
and never stopped, for he was never 
tired. He rode past laughing people and 
waved his arms at children blurring in 
the distance. He pushed his young legs 
on the pedals and flew past all the things 
of the country and then of the world, 
all the things best seen from the eyes of 
a young boy on a bicycle. 

The thing in the wicker basket ceased 
to exist. The grinning, gasping people 
ceased to exist and Father was someone 
sitting in a chair, smoking his pipe. 

Lars had reached the crest of Straw- 
berry Hill and he lifted his feet, drifting 
and floating downward, letting the 
wind and rain and sunlight whirl past. 

Mr. Nielson gently pulled Lars back 
in the wheelchair and rolled silently from 
the darkened tent into the afternoon. 

The people were sparse. They strag- 


gled by hoarse vendors and still rides, 
yawning and shuffling. 

Mr. Nielson forgot about the tent 
and began to talk. 

"Well, we go home now. AH day at 
the carnival, what, my son? Ah, Lars, I 
tell you. Mama should not have stayed 
home. Now you feel good, you will be 
a fine man and think, eh, Lars?" 

Mr. Nielson picked leaves from 
overhanging branches as he walked, 
feeling good and pleased. 

When he got into the car, he looked 
at his son's eyes. 

"Lars, there is nothing wrong? You 
don't look like you feel so good." 

Lars was going too fast to hear 
Father, the wind was shrieking too 
wildly. The green hills turning golden, 
the leaves from orange to white, and all 
the other boys and girls riding behind 
him, chasing, trying to catch him. 

He turned, laughing. "Who's the 
sissy now, who's the sissy now!" 

Mr. Nielson scowled. 

"You'll never catch me, you'll never 
catch me!" 

"What, what is that you say?" 

Lars sang into the wind as the chil- 
dren's voices grew faint. He waved his 
arms and pedaled with his legs and saw 
the beautiful hill stretching beneath him. 

"You just watch, you just watch!" 

The beautiful hill sloping graceful- 
ly downward and without an end. ■ 



"Good heavens, Elaine. . .have you seen the moon tonight?" 


TWILIGHT ZONE 75 


tV 

Beaumont 

CONTINUED FROM PAGE 53 

light Zone is about people— about human 
beings involved in extraordinary cir- 
cumstances, in strange problems of their 
own or of fate's making." 

Though Serling was contractually 
obligated to write eighty percent of The 
Twilight Zone's scripts himself, he made 
sure that the stories he adapted, and 
the writers he hired to write original 
scripts, maintained the highest standard 
of quality. After a brief (and disas- 
trous) call for unsolicited scripts, Ser- 
ling turned to two writers with proven 
experience in the form — Richard Mathe- 
son and Charles Beaumont. 

Between them, Matheson and Beau- 
mont wrote more than forty of the 
show's episodes. "Chuck and I just pitched 
ideas and then started in writing 
scripts," recalls Matheson. "For a long 
time, it was just the two of us and Rod.' 

As Rod Serling himself recalls, Beau- 
mont didn't make a particularly good 
impression at their first meeting. "This 
was just after [Serling's teleplay] Velvet 
Alley had aired," said Serling, "and 
Chuck Beaumont, whom 1 didn't even 
know, in a very tasteful way— nothing 
offensive in the way he did it— said 
'Quite honestly, I must tell you to your 
face, it's the worst piece of writing I've 
ever seen'. " Luckily, it had only a posi- 


tive effect on the working relationship 
between Beaumont and Serling. "It put 
Chuck and me on a very good basis, 
because I feel now not only the right 
but the obligation to speak to Chuck 
honestly. . . ." 

Among the most memorable of 
Beaumont's Twilight Zone episodes were 
"Perchance to Dream," about a cardiac 
patient who dreams of being scared to 
death by a beautiful woman; "Long Live 
Walter Jameson," starring Kevin McCar- 
thy as an immortal who is weary of 
life; "The Howling Man," about the 
Devil imprisoned in a monastery; and 
"Printer's Devil" based on Beaumont's 
own short story "The Devil, You Say?" 

Beaumont is also credited with 
several episodes which were written, at 
least in part, by other writers, including 
"The New Exhibit" (by Jerry Sohl), and 
"Number Twelve Looks Just Like You" 
(by John Tomerlin). In addition, he 
played an important part in the deci- 
sion to adapt several stories by George 
Clayton Johnson (including "The Four 
of Us Are Dying," "Execution," "The 
Prime Mover," and "Ninety Years With- 
out Slumbering.") Johnson himself went 
on to write four teleplays for The 
Twilight Zone: "A Penny for Your 
Thoughts," "Kick the Can," 'A Game of 



Pool," and "Nothing in the Dark." In all, 
as a writer, an adapter, and a catalyst 
for other writers, Beaumont made a 
greater contribution to The Twilight 
Zone than anyone other than Rod Ser- 
ling himself. And his episodes are ac- 
knowledged as among the program's 
best work. 

The Edge of Frenzy 
The summer of 1961 found Beaumont 
involved in an explosively controversial 
project: the first motion picture to deal 
with the volatile problem of Southern 
school integration. It was based on his 
novel The Intruder, inspired by a 1957 
Look magazine article about the efforts 
of segregationist John Kasper to sabotage 
school integration in Clinton, Tennes- 
see. Adam Cramer, the central figure in 
Beaumont’s story (portrayed by actor 
William Shatrier), is on a similar mis- 
sion. He fails, as Kasper failed, but not 
before mob violence has taken its ugly 
toll, as it actually did in Clinton. 

Intrigued by Kasper, Beaumont 
packed a suitcase and flew to Clinton to 
interview him. "Chuck just got up and 
went down there," recalls Matheson. 
"Lived there; talked to all of the people 
there. It seems to me he got himself a 
gun, too, because everybody was really 
suspicious about him going around ask- 
ing questions." 

A year and a half later his novel 
was finished. Beaumont was subse- 
quently hired to do the screenplay 
adaptation for director Roger Corman. 
When Corman, whose forte had long 
been science fiction/horror, was unable 
to obtain studio backing, he finished 
The Intruder on an independent basis. 
The movie was shot on location in and 
near Charleston, Missouri, on a shoe- 
string budget of one hundred thousand 
dollars, and utilized some three hundred 
local townspeople in its cast. Beaumont 
went along to oversee his script and to 
essay the cameo role of school principal 
Harley Paton. The film was never suc- 
cessful in general release due to compli- 
cations over its controversial nature. It 
was later exploited under the misnomer, 

I Hate Your Guts, and, later. Shame. 

Beaumont would later work with 
Corman on several Poe-inspired films, 
including The Premature Burial (written 
in collaboration with Ray Russell), The 
Haunted Palace, and The Masque of 
the Red Death. He also worked on such 
fantasy film classics as Bum, Witch, 
Bum (with Richard Matheson), The 
Wonderful World of the Brothers Grimm 
(with David P. Harmon and William 
Roberts), and the Oscar-winning film 
The Seven Faces of Dr. Lao. 



By now, film and television offers 
were flooding in. At times Beaumont 
juggled as many as a dozen projects 
simultaneously, and would have to farm 
the extra work out to his friends. 
"Chuck was hyper-energetic," says Mathe- 
son. "From the day I met him he was 
always hyperactive, always restless. 
Had to move. Had to go someplace. 
Got to go. I remember him talking 
about hating the idea of being asleep. 
He even hated the idea of someone see- 
ing him asleep. Because sleep to him 
was like: I'm not doing anything. I'm 
wasting time." 

At the peak of his career, Beau- 
mont rarely turned down an assign- 
ment, and he soon found himself over- 
whelmed with writing commitments. 
"He was taking on so much work that 
he couldn't do it all," says Johnson. "So 
he'd farm the work out to his friends — 
Ray Russell would be working with him 
on a Roger Corman film. Bill Nolan 
would be polishing a magazine article, 
Jery Sohl and myself would be at home 
writing the first draft of a television 
script while John Tomerlin was working 
on a third. And Chuck would be run- 
ning all over town, trying to keep dif- 
ferent appointments." 

Says Nolan: "Chuck tried to fit a 
million things into a spot where you 
could fit maybe a thousand. He'd some- 
times schedule, say, four meetings with 
different people for the same day. And 
he'd be late for all of them. So he'd say 
to the first person he was meeting, "Look, 
I'm running late and I've got to see Ray 
Russell. So come along and well talk 
on the way.' By the time he got to Ray's 
he'd be on short time, and he'd say, 
'Ray, jump in the car. I've got to see 
Dick Matheson, and well all talk while 
we're driving there.' And there would 
be whole entourages in the car by the 
time he got to the final person. It was 
really wild stuff. But he lived this kind 
of life at the edge of frenzy all the time." 

Nolan, Johnson, and Tomerlin's 
sales, at this point, were primarily in 
short fiction, and although the short 
story market of this time was a healthy 
one, their earnings were considerably 
less than that of Beaumont's. "Chuck 
was always trying to figure a way to get 
a little more work than he could do be- 
cause he knew we really wanted it; 
could really use it," says Johnson, "if it 
was something that could be done, that 
didn't have to have a personal touch. 

"He couldn't share the credit with 
you because they wouldn't keep hiring 
him if they knew he was forming a 
[writing] factory and farming out to his 
friends — we people who had not yet , 


succeeded in those circles." 

In return for his friends' help, 
Beaumont would split the money fifty- 
fifty with them. "Chuck was a big suc- 
cess," says Johnson. "He always had 
something going— an article, a story, a 
script. He also had the contacts. Al- 
though the rest of us were working, 
there was a great envy in us of him. We 
all would've liked to have had that." 

Though he'd attained a high-level 
of creative and financial success in film 
and television, Beaumont had often 
confided to close friends his desire to 
return to novel writing, and, in 1963, 
decided to finish Where No Man 
Walks — a novel he'd begun in 1957. 

But time was running out on 
Beaumont. 

Remember? Remember? 

By mid-1963 his concentration began 
to slip; he was using Bromo Seltzer 
constantly to cope with ever-increasing 
headaches. Friends remarked he looked 
notably older than his thirty-four years. 
By 1964, he could no longer write. 
Meetings with producers turned disas- 
trous. His speech became slower; more 
deliberate. His concentration worsened. 
Meanwhile, his family and friends desper- 
ately tried to understand and treat his 


symptoms. "Chuck had constant head- 
aches," says Nolan. "I can't think of 
Chuck without the word 'headache'. He 
was always in good spirits and didn't let 
the headaches stop him, but it was 
something he was fighting all the time." 

In the summer of 1964, after a bat- 
tery of tests at UCLA, Beaumont was 
diagnozed as having Alzheimer's Disease; 
he faced premature senility, aging, and 
an early death. "The saving grace to it," 
says Tomerlin, "if there is one in a dis- 
ease like that, is he was not really 
aware, after the very beginning, that 
there was anything wrong with him. 
When he first began to show strong 
symptoms of it, he would have kind of 
momentary flashes of great concern, as 
though he saw something happening 
and couldn't understand what it was. 
But it was a fairly gentle process." 

Charles Beaumont died February 
21, 1967, at the age of thirty-eight. His 
last hardcover book was titled Remem- 
ber? Remember?, and as Bill Nolan ob- 
serves, "there is so much to remember 
about Charles Beaumont: [a] midnight 
call in California. . .Chuck calling from 
Chicago to tell me he planned to spend 
the day with Ian Fleming and why not 
join them? . . . the frenzied, nutty nights 
when we plotted Mickey Mouse adven- 



Beaumont 



tures for the Disney Magazines . . . the 
bright, hot, exciting racing weekends at 
Palm Springs, Torrey Pines, Pebble 
Beach ... the whirlwind trips to Paris 
and Nassau and New York ... the ses- 
sion on the set at Twilight Zone when 
he'd exclaim, 'I write it and they create 
it in three dimensions. God, but it's 
magic!' . . . the fast, machine-gun rattle 
of his typewriter as I talked to Helen in 
the kitchen while he worked in the den 
. . . the rush to the newsstand for the 
latest Beaumont story. ..." 

Charles Beaumont: 

WRITING AS THERAPY 

"I'm very cynical. I don't believe in 
Extra Sensory Perception or polter- 
geists or flying saucers. I don't believe 
in ghosts, either. What I do believe in 
is the capacity of the human mind to 
create objects of fear — what is more 
frightening, for instance, than 
Frankenstein's monster? What we fan- 
tasy writers do is create substitutes 
for belief. 

"All the fantasy writers I know 
have a way of dwelling on their own 
fears and phobias. A writer spends his 
life being his own psychiatrist." 


Chad Oliver, who'd met Beaumont 
during his stay in Los Angeles while at- 
tending UCLA in 1952, recalls him as a 
man of enormous vitality and energy. "I 
can't remember what it was particularly 
that attracted me to Chuck, except for 
his tremendous enthusiasm for life." 

"Chuck loved fast cars and racing," 
recalls Ray Russell. "He loved music 
and comic strips and fine books and 
good music. He loved language, our 
motley, marvelous English in particular. 
But most of all, he loved to write." 
And, though much of Beaumont's fic- 
tion deals with the macabre, his per- 
sonality was anything but morbid. "He 
was full of wit and warmth," says Rus- 
sell, "and was not ashamed of being a 
deep-dyed romantic." 

"He was a dear, dear friend," says 
George Clayton Johnson. "I think of 
Chuck as one of the most influential 
men in our lives and someone who was 
largely responsible for Nolan, Tomer- 
Iin, and myself becoming writers." 

Beaumont was, above all, a crafts- 
man, a born storyteller who was able 
to touch something universal in all of 
us, while adding a unique, echoing, in- 
definable ambience which was distinc- 
tively his. He was gifted with the abili- 
ty to entertain us, while showing us the 


Chad Oliver: the blue 

SUIT WITH THE RED VEST 

"Chuck Beaumont had one good suit. 
It was a blue suit. And he had a red 
waistcoat-type vest that he wore with 
it. And when things were really going 
badly for him, financially — which was 
frequently, as an aspiring writer — 
Chuck would put on the suit with the 
red vest and would go, as I recall, 
down on Sunset Boulevard, into the 
fanciest restaurants he could find and 
ask to see the manager. He would say, 
as only Chuck could, nothing obse- 
quious about it, 'Sir, I am Charles 
Beaumont. I am going to be a world- 
famous writer. If you will give me a 
free meal, I will make you famous 
some day by putting you in a story.' I 
saw him do this on two occasions, 
and Chuck told me that in all the 
years he pulled this stunt— and he 
pulled it a lot— he'd only been turned 
down once. One of the things I'd al- 
ways admired about him was the style 
with which he'd pulled it off. It was 
none of this, 'Oh, gosh. I'm down on 
my luck; things are terrible.' No. He 
was doing them a favor by walking in 
and agreeing to eat in their restaurant. 
And that's the way he looked at it." 


darker, more private parts of ourselves 
at the same time. The innovations he 
and his colleagues brought to horror 
and fantasy are the foundation of those 
genres current popularity. Every writer, 
artist, or filmmaker who has followed 
Beaumont into that night country he 
knew so well — from Stephen King and 
Steven Spielberg to Clive Barker and 
David Cronenberg— owes him an enor- 
mous debt. 

Although he didn't live to realize 
his full potential, he packed more 
creativity into a dozen years than most 
writers accomplish in a lifetime. By the 
time of his death, he'd written and sold 
ten books, seventy-four short stories, 
thirteen screenplays (nine of which 
were produced), two dozen articles and 
profiles, forty stories for comics, and 
over seventy teleplays. 

But though Beaumont is gone, the 
magic that he wove in those all-night 
coffee shop bull sessions, those drives 
to the beach, those solitary hours 
behind the typewriter, those rare, quiet 
moments at home, is still alive. It's alive 
in the family he left behind, the friends 
whose lives and careers were touched 
and moved by his, and in the words 
he wrote that continue to move us 
today. ■ 


78 TWILIGHT ZONE 




TZ TELEPLAY 
BY 

GEORGE 

CLAYTON 

JOHNSON 

The original teleplay first broad- 
cast on January 5, 1962 


Producer Buck Houghton 

Director Lamont Johnson 

CAST 

Wanda Dunn Gladys Cooper 

Harold Beldon Robert Redford 

Man R.G. Armstrong 


ACT ONE 

FADE IN: 

1. (STANDARD OPENING) 

INTERIOR TENEMENT APARTMENT NIGHT 

2. CLOSE SHOT WANDA DUNN 

Sleeping lightly in her bed, the covers drawn about her chin. 
A soft splash of light illuminates her ancient features. Wanda 
is incredibly old; her face seamed and lined with the hatchet 
grooves of the years— and yet it is a kindly, gentle face. She 
stirs in her sleep. 

SOUND: The rasp of cautious footsteps on the pave- 
ment outside. This is a basement apartment and the windows 
are above the bed. Wanda comes awake, her eyes alert. She 
cocks her head, listening. 

Again the SOUND of quiet footfalls. They pause beside 
the window. Wanda's eyes follow the sound apprehensively. 

3. ANOTHER ANGLE THE WINDOW 

Several heavy boards are nailed across it. Between the chinks 
we see the shadow of a man's legs silhouetted. 

Copyright © 1961 


4. CLOSE SHOT WANDA * 

A look of dread pinches her face. 

5. ANOTHER ANGLE 

As Wanda quietly pushes back the covers and sits up. She is 
dressed in an old-style ugly night dress that covers her from 
chin to toes. She looks about the dim room as though taking 
a hasty inventory. 

6. PANNING SHOT HER POV 

We see dusty, broken furniture, sagging wallpaper, a warped 
floor. The room is decrepit with age and neglect. In one wall 
is a door barricaded with furniture. The windows are criss- 
crossed with boards as though to repel invaders. The main 
entrance to the room is equipped with a night chain, a heavy 
bolt and a lock, all dogged in place. 

7. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 

Satisfied. Everything is as she left it. And now we watch the 
play of expressions on her face as she listens to the stealthy 
drag of shoeleather on the pavement. There is a muffled o.s. 
(offstage) shout and a sudden clatter as the offstage feet 
break into a run. A POLICE WHISTLE SOUNDS, shrill, 
urgent. A brace of GUNSHOTS blasts the stillness. 

8. WIDER ANGLE 

As Wanda fearfully edges out of the bed, fits her feet into 
slippers and cautiously moves to the door. She stands rigid, 
her expression fearful. More FOOTFALLS from outside, 
above. Another GUNSHOT, close, loud. A GRUNT of pain 
followed by the heavy, slithering thump of a body tumbling 

by George Clayton Johnson 


TWILIGHT ZONE 79 


% - 


NOTHING IN THE DARK 



down a flight of concrete steps. The door rattles in its frame 
as the o.s. body slams against it. Wanda flinches backward. 
She has stopped breathing as sjie listens. A MOAN — a weak 
rap at the door. 

VOICE (O.S.) 

(weakly, a husky whisper) 

Help. . . ! 

(a long pause) 

Please — help! 

Wanda freezes against the door. 

WANDA 

(timid) 

Who is it? Go away! 

VOICE (O.S.) 

(in pain) 

Please — I've been shot.... Need help!! 

Wanda is very frightened. Her withered hand goes to the 
night chain and then draws back. 

WANDA 

Who are you? 

VOICE (O.S.) 

(the words come very 
hard indeed) 

I'm an officer— police. Open the door. . . . 

(a wracking cough) 

Need help. 

Wanda's expression is a compound of uncertainty and hid- 
eous fear. She makes a decision. 

WANDA 
(in agony) 

You're lying to me. I know you. You can't 
fool me. 

VOICE (O.S.) 

(weak— very weak) 

Help. . . . 

Wanda blinks uncertainly. 

WANDA 

(stronger) 

You're lying. You're no policeman. Why 
can't you leave me alone? I know who you 
are. 

(a beat) 


I know what you are! 

Her fear is a naked thing. WHIP PAN TO SERLING sitting 
on her recently occupied bed. He looks at her with pity. 
SERLING 

An old woman living in a nightmare. An 
old woman who has fought a thousand 
battles with death and always won. 

Now she's faced with a grim decision — 
whether or not to open a door. And in 
some strange and frightening way she 
knows that this seemingly ordinary door 
leads to The Twilight Zone. 

FADE TO BLACK 

BILLBOARD 
FIRST COMMERCIAL 

FADE ON: 

9. INTERIOR WANDA'S APARTMENT 
ANGLE ON DOOR 

As Wanda stands frozen with terror, her back pressed 
against the door frame, with only the movement of her eyes 
to tell us of her fright. She is listening intently, and when the 
VOICE MOANS once again it is all she can do to keep from 
crying out. 

VOICE (O.S.) 

(faintly, weakly) 

Help. . . . Won't somebody help. . .? 

WANDA 

(a terrified whisper) 

Go away! I won't listen. Go away. 

When there is no further sound from beyond the door, Wanda 
slowly relaxes. Muscle by muscle her tension drains from 
her. A great sigh. Is it possible that he has gone7 Seeing that 
his ruse has failed, has he given up? Quietly her hand goes to 
the bolt and draws it. She turns the knob and eases the door 
open against the night chain. She peers through the crack in 
the door. CAMERA MOVES WITH HER so that we see as 
she sees the form sprawled on her doorstep. This is 
HAROLD BELDON. With a start she almost slams the door 
again but something stays her hand. Beldon's eyes are closed 
and he is unmoving. Ready to slam the door at his first 
move, she studies his face. He is unconscious. His head has 
fallen back so that we can see his face clearly. It is a young, 
open face. Though drawn with shock and pain it is a face in- 
capable of deception. His lashes flutter with returning con- 
sciousness and he moans softly. Surrounded by the hard 
concrete walls of the areaway, he looks very helpless and vul- 
nerable. Her breath catches in her throat as his eyes blink 
open. 

BELDON 

(weak) 

Unless you help me I'm going to die. I — I 
don't think I can move. 

WANDA 

(pleading) 

Don't say that! It isn't fair. You're trying to 
trick me. 

A bewildered look from Beldon. He shifts his arm to gain 
leverage in an attempt to sit up. At this slight motion Wanda's 
fingers grip the door. 

WANDA 

Don't move— I'll close the door. 

A look of confusion floods Beldon's features. He doesn't 
understand what is going on. It is all he can do to retain con- 


80 TWILIGHT ZONE 



sciousness. 

BELDON 

What. . .? I've been shot. I'm bleeding to 
death. 

(the effort to speak is almost 
too much for him. After a 
moment, he continues) 

My name is Harold Beldon. I need an am- 
bulance— a doctor. Please— call the hospital. 

Wanda's face twists in an agony of indecision. It is possible 
that he is telling the truth but she cannot take the chance. 
WANDA 

I haven't a telephone. I'd have to unlock 
the door. You can't ask me to do that. I 
don't want to die. You understand? I know 
who you are! 

(a moan) 

Oh, why don't you leave me alone! 

Beldon tries to comprehend what she is saying. He under- 
stands the words but not the sense. The effort of trying to 
stay awake has beaded him with perspiration and his last 
strength is ebbing. 


10. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 

The realization that he is going to die here in this black 
cement hole makes his face crumple. 

BELDON 

(stunned) 

You're not going to help me. For some rea- 
son I don't understand . . . you're going to 
let me die. 

(overcome by the horror of 
the thought, he searches for 
the why of it) 

You're afraid of me— yes, that's it. But 
why7 The uniform ... the gun? No — some- 
thing else. 

(a shudder goes through him 
and he gasps with pain) 

Hurts! Oh, God, it hurts! 


11. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 

She squeezes her eyes closed and presses her face against the 
cold door frame. A terrible pity for the man in pain pulls at 
her. 

WANDA 

Stop it— stop it! Don't torture me. It isn't 
fair! 

12. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 

Painfully he puts his hand inside his coat. It comes out 
stained with red. He looks dazedly at the blood. 

(brokenly) 

I'm bleeding. . weak. . .can't move. . . 
hurts. . . . 

(his eyes glaze, he sags and 
the breath seems to go out 
of him) 

His hand trails limply on the pavement and is still. 

13. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 

Shaking with emotion as she struggles with the conflicting 
urges — fear for self and compassion for another. 


_ BY GEORGE CLAYTON JOHNSON 

WANDA 

It isn't fair. It isn't fair. 

Slowly her hand goes to the night chain -draws back. She 
looks at o.s. Beldon. 

14. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 

Eyes closed -helpless -groaning softly, near unconsciousness. 

15. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 

A flood of pity. In a blind urgency she unlatches the chain. 

16. WIDER ANGLE 

As the door opens and Wanda peers out. After a careful sur- 
vey of the surrounding area she moves to Beldon, her fear of 
him still evident in her posture. Slowly her hand moves 
down to his shoulder, hovers there for a moment— then 
touches. She pauses as though listening to an inner music 
After a brief interval her face relaxes. 

WANDA 

(wonderingly) 

I'm still alive .... 

And now, briskly for one her age, she sets about the task of 
getting him inside. Fortunately she is not too frail for the 
undertaking. Once across the doorsill she closes the door 
and re-latches it. She leaves Beldon on the floor to return 
with a pillow, a blanket, and a small medical kit. Safe once 
again inside the house, her face has softened. With tender 
hands she sets about ministering to him. 

DISSOLVE TO: 

17. ANGLE ON SOFA DAY 

Early morning sunlight filters through the chinks in the win- 
dows. Beldon has been transferred to the sofa, his head 
propped with pillows, his br#ss-buttoned coat and holster 
draped over a nearby chair. He has recovered amazingly and 
his face is no longer pale with pain. Wanda enters scene 
humming and crosses to him. She adjusts the Markets and 
leans back to look at him. 

WANDA 

There— you got to keep warm. 

BELDON 
(grateful smile) 

You should get some rest. I feel much 
better. 

(shifts position and winces) 

When the doctor gets here he'll take me off 
your hands. 

(at expression on her face, he 
pauses, coming to realization) 

You didn't call the doctor. 

She evades his eyes nervously. 

BELDON (CONT'D) 

But why not? 


18. ANOTHER ANGLE FEATURING WANDA 
WANDA 

I— I can't. 

(after -a pause, in a rush) 

I don't have a telephone. 

BELDON 

Couldn't you go to one of the neighbors? 
WANDA 

They aren't any. They all moved away. 


TWILIGHT ZONE 81 



NOTHING IN THE DARK 


Trucks came and took away thgir furniture 
— first one and then another. Even if I 
could call a doctor somehow I couldn't 
take a chance and let him in. Don't you 
see? He could be him. 

BELDON 

(perplexed) 

Him? 

WANDA 

(nodding) 

He has many names— The Dark One— The 
Grim Reaper— Mr. Death. 

(sees his look of disbelief) 

I know he's out there. He's been trying to 
get in. He comes to the door and knocks. 

He begs me to open the door. Last week 
he said he was from the gas company. Oh, 
he's clever. After that he claimed to be a 
contractor hired by the city, but I knew 
who he was. He said the building was con- 
demned, that I'd have to leave. I kept the 
door locked and he went away. He knows 
that I'm on to him. 

BELDON 

(trying to understand) 

Mr. Death? A person? Someone like you 
or me? Someone with arms and legs and a 
face7 

Wanda nods with a shiver of fright. She can see that he 
doesn't believe her. 

WANDA 

It does sound crazy. 

(with terrible intensity) 

But it's true! I know it is. 

BELDON 

People die all over the world. China — 

Africa — Europe — at this very instant peo- 
ple are dying. How could one man be in 
all those places at once? 

The sanity and logic of the question tears her apart. She 
doesn't know the answer; all she knows is what she feels. 
WANDA 
(a cry) 

Don't ask that! I don't know! Maybe 
there's more than one. Maybe — 

(she can't continue) 

As she shakes with dry sobs, Beldon's eyes fill with pity. 
BELDON 

Don't— don't cry. I don't want to hurt you. 

He reaches his hand up toward her. She slumps to her knees 
beside him. 

BELDON 

There — please — there. 

He awkwardly pats her shoulder; her crying subsides. 
WANDA 

At first I wasn't sure. It was a long time 
ago. I was on a bus. There was an old 
woman sitting in front of me knitting— 
socks, I think. There was something about 
her face — I felt I knew her. Then this 
young man got on. There were empty 
seats but he sat down beside her. He didn't 
say anything, but his being there upset 
her. He seemed like a nice young man. 

When she dropped her yam, he picked it 


up. Right in front of me he held it out to 
her. I saw their fingers touch. He got off at 
the next stop. 

(a beat) 

When the bus reached the end of the line, 
she was dead. 

BELDON 

You said yourself she was an old woman .... 
WANDA 

But I've seen him since then— many times. 

19. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 

WANDA (CONT'D) 

I've seen him in crowds; I watched for 
him. Every time someone I knew died, he 
was there. Once he was a young soldier— 
a salesman — a taxi driver— someone you 
wouldn't notice unless you were watching. 
I wondered why I could see him and no 
one else could, and then 1 knew. It was be- 
cause I was getting old and my time was 
coming. I could see some things clearer 
than younger people. 

20. TWO SHOT FEATURING WANDA 

BELDON 

(going along with her) 

But if you know what he looks like, why 
be afraid? You could avoid him. 

WANDA 

His face is always different. I couldn't be 
sure. 

BELDON 

(trying to show absurdity of 
idea) 

When you go out— couldn't he touch you 
then if he wanted to? 

WANDA 

(firmly) 

I never go out. 

BELDON 

(doubtfully) 

Never? 

WANDA 

(points to barricaded windows) 

I haven't for years. 

BELDON 

(shocked) 

What about food? 

WANDA 

A boy delivers it. I leave the money and a 
list and I always wait till he's gone before 
I unlock the door. 

BELDON 

(outraged) 

How can you live like this? 

21. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 

WANDA 

If I don't live like this, I won't live at all. If 
I relax my guard for even a moment, he'll 
get in somehow. 

(reflectively) 

I didn't always live like this. I was young, 
once. People said I was pretty. I lived out 


82 TWILIGHT ZONE 


BY GEORGE CLAYTON JOHNSON 


in the sunlight. People said I'd spoil my 
fine complexion but I didn’t care. I loved 
outdoor things. 

(the light dies in her eyes as 
she looks about her) 

I lived out in the sunlight. 

She sees a patch of sun on the floor near her knee. She puts 
out one of her hands to form a cup for it. Her hand blazes 
with the sun. 

WANDA (CONT'D) 

I've always hated the cold and the dark. 

I’m old. I've lived a long time but I don't 
want to die. 

(she shivers) 

I'd rather live in the dark than not live at 
all. 

22. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 
Reacting. He is deeply moved. 

BELDON 

Easy. No one is going to hurt you. We're 
alone here and there's no one at the door. 

You need rest. 

(he shifts again and pain 
autographs his face) 

And I — I need help. 

23. TWO SHOT 

Wanda sags tiredly. She xises and moves to a nearby chair. 
There is a sudden noise at the door -the thud of heavy heels 
descending the concrete steps. There is a staccato knock on 
the door. 

24. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 

Reacting. Surprised. A quick look at Wanda and then at the 
door. His eyes swing back to Wanda with a deep look of 
concern. 

25. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 

Icy with fear- eyes wide and apprehensive. She has stopped 
breathing. 



then another. Now she is at the door. With trembling fingers 
she checks the night chain to assure herself it is fastened. An- 
other demanding KNOCK. She jerks with the impact of the 
sound. Her face is pale as she slowly draws the bolt. 


29. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 

He is affected by her evident terror. He, too, is drawn bow- 
tight. He leans forward. In spite of himself he stares at the 
door. 


30. CLOSE ON WANDA 

As she turns the knob -slowly- slowly. The bolt rasps in the 
silence. She pulls the door open an inch at a time. Suddenly, 
shockingly, a pressure from outside shoves the door open the 
length of the night chain and a FACE appears at the opening. 

31. CLOSE SHOT THE FACE 

Filling the screen framed by the door and the jamb. It is a 
hard face. 


26. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 

For a brief moment he is caught up in her terror. He shakes 
himself back to reality. 


32. CLOSE SHOT A FOOT 

Wedging the door open, blocking the door so that it cannot 
be closed. 


27. ANOTHER ANGLE FEATURING WANDA 
DOOR IN B.G. 

She cannot move. 

WANDA 
(a gasp) 

No!! 

Again the sharp KNOCK. 

28. ANGLE WIDENS TO INCLUDE BELDON 

BELDON 

There — it's probably nothing to fear. You'd 
better answer it. 

This is the last thing in the world that Wanda wants to do. 
She is convinced beyond reason that Mr. Death is standing 
on her doorstep. With a tremendous effort of will she takes 
a step toward the door. 

BELDON 

That's right— go ahead. 

She looks over her shoulder in despair. She takes another step. 


33. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 

Falling back in terror. She stares. 

34. HER POV THE NIGHT CHAIN 

The force has loosened the attachment to the door frame. One 
of the screws is missing and the rest are loose. The attach- 
ment has pulled part-way free of the ancient wood. 

35. CAMERA ZOOMS INTO A CLOSE-UP WANDA 

36. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 

Startled concern. 

37. CLOSE SHOT THE FACE 

An angry expression. 

MAN 

I'm sorry, lady, but I have my orders. I 
can't fool around any longer. 

He tries to push the door from between them. The night chain 


TWILIGHT ZONE 83 



!v 


NOTHING IN THE DARK 



gives way with a splintering sound. The door swings wide. 

38. ANGLE TO INCLUDE WANDA MAN 

He takes a step into the room. Wanda cannot move. She is 
stricken into immobility by her terror. The man takes anoth- 
er step. With a wild flutter of eyelids, she slumps to the floor. 
The man reacts with surprise and bends over her. His hands 
poise over her. 

39. CLOSE SHOT HIS HANDS 
As they touch her shoulders. 

FADE TO BLACK. 

BILLBOARD 

SECOND COMMERCIAL 
ACT II 

FADE IN: 

40. INTERIOR APARTMENT CLOSE SHOT 
WANDA . DAY 

She is unconscious on the floor. The man bends over her, his 
expression unreadable. He takes her wrist and feels for a 
pulse. 

41. ANGLE ON BELDON 

Watching intently. Apparently the man has not seen him yet. 

42. ANOTHER ANGLE MAN WANDA 
BELDON IN B.G. 

The man hunkers down and picks Wanda up. He carries her 
to the bed, props up her head with a pillow, smooths back 
her hair. 

43. CLOSE ON WANDA 
Still and pale. 

44. CLOSE SHOT MAN 
Looking down on her. 

45. TWO SHOT 

Wanda stirs, a frightened moan, her eyes open. It takes her 
a few seconds to orient herself. Abruptly she realizes what 


has happened. 

MAN 

Easy, lady. 

Wanda tries to pull away from him. 

MAN (CONT'D) 

Just lie quiet till you get your strength 
back. 

The man takes a bandanna out of his pocket and swabs at 
his forehead. 

MAN (CONT'D) 

You gave me quite a scare when you caved 
in like that. 

Wanda looks down at herself. 

WANDA 

(wonderingly) 

And still I live .... 

She looks at the man, confused. 

MAN 

(apologetically) 

You got to understand, ma'am. I don't get no 
pleasure out of busting down doors, but 
you don't seem to savvy how important 
this is. I got a crew and equipment coming 
in an hour to pull this tenement down. 

(he looks about the room 
with distaste) 

Begging your pardon, but it's long over- 
due. I'm surprised it's still standing. 

He has moved aside so that she can sit up. 

WANDA 

You really aren't Mr. Death. . .? 

MAN 

I don't know what you're talking about. 

All I know is I got a contract to demolish 
this row of buildings. Everybody else 
moved out long ago. Until the other day I 
thought this building was deserted. I seen 
them windows boarded up and I figured 
you moved when the rest of them did. 

Wanda gives him a stricken look. 

WANDA 

You want me to go outside? To leave here. 

But I can't. Don't you see? 

The man shakes his head at her obstinacy. 

MAN 

(patiently) 

You were notified months ago, right? I'm 
just trying to do my job. These buildings 
were condemned by the city and I'm the 
one who's got to tear them down. 

WANDA 

How can you? 

MAN 

(exasperated) 

The building is old — run clown. I can see 
how you could get attached to it and not 
want to see it destroyed, but when a build- 
ing is old and unsafe it's got to come down 
to make room for new buildings. That's 
life, lady. The old has to make room for 
the new. 

(a change of tone — softer) 

People ask me why I do what I do — de- 
stroy things, but in a way I'm not a de- 
stroyer at all. I just clear the ground so 


84 TWILIGHT ZONE 



other people can create. In a way I help 
them do it. 

The man shrugs self-consciously. 

MAN (CONT'D) 

Look around. It's the way things are. Trees 
fall and new ones grow out of the same 
ground. Animals give way to new animals 
and even people step aside when it's time. 

46. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 

She shakes her head stubbornly. 

WANDA 

I won't. 

She looks o.s. 

WANDA (CONT'D) 

(with fright) 

The door, . . . 

47. HER POV THE DOOR 

It stands open, sunlight streaming onto the warped floor. 

48. ANGLE ON WANDA 

As she gets quickly to her feet and goes to the door. She 
swings it closed and reaches for the bolt. The man has fol- 
lowed her and as he sees her intention he puts out a restrain- 
ing hand. 

MAN 

(firmly) 

No need for that. What's the sense locking 
a door that won't be here in an hour? If 
you got any possessions you want to keep, 

I'd move them out of here. I'll help you. 

When she hesitates, his tone hardens. 

MAN (CONT'D) 

I been trying to go easy but if you insist 
on staying here I'll have to call a cop. 

Please cooperate, lady. 

At the mention of a cop, a thought occurs to Wanda. Her 
confusion vanishes. 

WANDA 

Of course. . . . 

49. ANOTHER ANGLE TO INCLUDE BELDON 

He is propped up on one elbow regarding them. Wanda 
crosses to him followed by the man. 

WANDA 
(to Beldon) 

Explain to him. Tell him the reason I can't 
go out there. You'll help me, won't you? 

Beldon looks up at the man. 

MAN 

(confused) 

What are you doing? Who are you talking 
to? 

He looks down at Beldon blankly. 

WANDA 

Mr. Beldon is a policeman. He'll explain it 
to you. 

MAN 

Mr. Beldon? Are you all right, lady? 

(he eyes her suspiciously) 

I tried to be as gentle as I could. 

WANDA 
(to Beldon) 

Please tell him. 


_ BY GEORGE CLAYTON JOHNSON 

The man looks from Wanda to Beldon. He begins to edge 
away. He pauses at the door. 

MAN 

I m sorry, lady, but if you're still here when 
the crew arrives. 111 have to call a cop. 

He looks back at the couch and shrugs. He exits. Wanda 
looks curiously at Beldon. 

WANDA 

Why didn't you help me? I thought you 
understood. 

She turns away and suddenly pauses. A hideous thought has 
occurred to her. 

50. CLOSE SHOT HER FACE 

An abrupt transition from mild annoyance to sickening terror. 

51. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 

He knows the jig is up. 

52. TWO SHOT 

As Wanda whirls. Her breath hisses between her teeth 
WANDA 
(accusing) 

You!! He looked right at you and didn't see 
you . . . ! 

(realization) 

No!! 

Beldon lowers his eyes. He swallows. He didn't want it to 
happen like this. 

BELDON 

(gently) 

Look in the mirror, Wanda. 

53. CLOSE UP WANDA * 

She turns her head toward her cracked mirror. 

54. WANDA'S POV TO MIRROR 

She can see the couch on which Beldon lies. It is empty. 

55. MEDIUM SHOT 

AS WANDA TURNS BACK TO BELDON 
WANDA 
(shrill horror) 

You tricked me! 

(disbelief) 

You tricked me. . . ! It was you all the time. 

BELDON 

(softly) 

Yes — I tricked you. 

WANDA 

(rigid) 

But why? Once I let you inside you could 
have taken me anytime and yet you didn't. 

You acted— nice. You made me trust you. 

Beldon nods. 

BELDON 

I had to make you understand. 

Confused silence. 

BELDON (CONT'D) 

(soft) 

Am I really so frightening? Am I really so 
bad? 

Wanda cocks her head. She isn't sure she understands. 


TWILIGHT ZONE 85 



NOTHING IN THE DARK 

BELDON (CONT'D) 

You've talked with me, confided in me. 

Have I taken advantage of you? Have I 
tried to hurt you? 

Wanda reacts, puzzled. Her initial terror has subsided a bit. 
What is he talking about? She has penetrated his secret and 
yet he continues to act as before. She relaxes her guard a 
trifle. 

BELDON (CONT'D) 

It's not me you're frightened of— you un- 
derstand me. What frightens you is the 
unknown. What frightens you is the land 
from which no traveler returns. 

Wanda's face shows a flare of apprehension. 

BELDON (CONT'D) 

(reassuring) 

You needn't be afraid. 

He rises from the couch— all signs of his recent weakness 
gone— and moves toward her. His face is relaxed and friendly. 
WANDA 
(shrinking back) 

But 1 am afraid. 

BELDON 

The running is over and it's time to rest. 

Give me your hand. 

He holds out his hand. 

WANDA 
(a cry) 

But I don't want to die! 

BELDON 

(soothingly) 

And you didn't want to live. You struggled 
against it till you were blue and the doctor 
had to slap you firmly to make you breathe. 

And you did. You grew accustomed to it 
and found it good. It was natural and right 
and now it is done. 

(pleading) 

Trust me. 

Wanda backs against the wall. 

WANDA 

No! No. . . ! 

His hand trembles before her. She looks at it with horror. 
Then she looks at his eyes. 

56. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 
His eyes quiet— steady— friendly. 

57. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 
Her confusion is stark and pitiful. 

58. TWO SHOT TIGHT 

BELDON 

(warm) 

Mother, give me your hand. 

Looking at him, seeing the quietness in his eyes, her expres- 
sion softens. Her hand trembles toward his. She tenses her- 
self for a shock as her hand touches his. Nothing happens. 
She looks questioningly at him. 

BELDON 

You see? No shock. No engulfment. No 
tearing asunder. What you feared would 
come like an explosion is like a whisper. 

What you thought was the end — is the 
beginning. 


Beldon smiles warmly and turns away. 

WANDA 

But when will it happen? When will we go? 

Beldon turns toward her and points o.s. 

BELDON 

Go. . .7 Look! 

59. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 
Awe and wonder. 

60. ANGLE ON COUCH HER POV 

On it we see the body of Wanda herself. Her hands are 
crossed on her chest in an attitude of peace, her eyes closed, 
her face serene. 

BELDON'S VOICE 
We have already begun. 



61. CLOSE SHOT WANDA 

Reacting. A note of excitement. 

62. CLOSE SHOT BELDON 

Smiling, at ease. 

63. TWO SHOT 

He holds out his arm gallantly. She timidly takes it. They 
turn toward the door. 

64. FULL SHOT (SILENT) 

The ugly room. In background we see Wanda turn to Beldon 
eagerly. They are in animated conversation like old friends as 
Beldon opens the door at the far end of the room. The 
LIGHTS go down in the ugly room as they pass through the 
door into the white, bright sunlight beyond. The door cuts a 
blazing hole in the blackness. 

SERLING'S VOICE 

There is nothing in the dark that wasn't 
there when the light was on. Proven in 
part by this brief excursion through the 
strange geography of The Twilight Zone. 

SLOWLY FADE TO BLACK 
THE END ■ 


86 TWILIGHT ZONE 



TZ3: Differing Visions 


THE ZONE 

CONTINUED FROM PAGE 24 

Twilight Zone, I find I am strangely un- 
sure what to say. It is, I suppose, in- 
dicative of the melancholy that comes 
with the conclusion of any season of a 
television series. The preceding year- 
plus was a mad, wonderful parade of 
deadlines and frantic writing and non- 
stop work. 

Then, one day, it just stops. 

The only question now is whether 
it will pick up again anytime in the 
near future. 

It's my understanding that MGM/ 
UA, desiring the thirty episodes we did 
only to fill out its syndication package, 
and currently in the throes of a finan- 
cial and management crisis, may not 
choose to commission any further epi- 
sodes, despite TZ3' s success in the rat- 
ings. (Their interest, it seems, is in long- 
term syndication, not short-term ratings.) 
Now, it's possible that this attitude may 
change (miracles, I'm told, do occur) 
but at this time, it seems that our best 
bet for another season — call it “TZ3.5", 
if you will — is to get back on CBS. 

Failing that, this could well be the 
final run for The Twilight Zone, until 
some uncertain day, years down the 
road, when someone at the network de- 
cides that the time has come to once 
again open the door to the wonders 
and eccentric residents of the Twilight 
Zone. George Clayton Johnson told me 
a few weeks ago that he believes it will 
come again, someday. He says that the 
concept is eternal, that the fires of im- 
agination that bum at the heart of the 
Twilight Zone cannot be long extin- 
guished. Somewhere, somehow, some- 
day, it will return. 

I hope he's right. 

Because whether I'm a part of it or 
not, a part of the Twilight Zone is now 
in me. Spending time in the Zone over 
the last year-plus has this tendency to 
make one believe in miracles, and the 
remarkable power of the human being 
singular to create magic from dust, to 
elevate the human condition to a state 
of dignity and self-realization, to say 
something of value in a medium chroni- 
cally undervalued. 

One way or another. The Twilight 
Zone will survive. Because where it is, 
those who would erase it, those who 
come armored in suits and sober sensi- 
bilities and bottom-line perspectives, 
cannot enter. 

It was a heck of a time. 

It was one wild ride. 

And I'm honored to have been a 
part of it, to have shared in its magic 
by simple proximity. 

Thank you, and goodnight, 
from. . .The Twilight Zone. ■ 


After reviewing the article "Return of 
the Zone'' [December 1988] we feel you 
owe it to your readers to present a more 
balanced view of the internal workings 
of the show, particularly in the critical 
development period. 

If one were to take the article at 
face value, one would assume that TZ3 
should be called the "J. Michael Strac- 
zynski Show." While Joe may be a good 
writer and story editor, we beg to differ 
with his view. 

Let us begin by saying that the de- 
velopment of the show was, through- 
out, a team process, as mandated by 
the Executive Producer Mark Shelmer- 
dine. As story editors on an equal foot- 
ing with Straczynski, we brought a lot 
to that process. We co-wrote the writer's 
bible, known as "The Vision," with 
Straczynski, based on Shelmerdine's orig- 
inal draft. In addition, we wrote several 
highly praised episodes, and were inti- 
mately involved in setting the show's 
tone and direction. 

In his article, Straczynski made 
reference to us as writers "whose back- 
grounds were primarily in sitcom writ- 
ing and who were eventually let go." 
We resent the implication that our writ- 
ing and contribution to the show as 
story editors were in some way lacking 
and that we left the show under a cloud. 
Nothing could be further from the truth. 

When the term of our contract came 
to an end, we were reassigned by Mark 
Shelmerdine to assist in the development 
of another television show. We are still 
employed by London Films in that ca- 
pacity, and, are happy to report that as 
recently as October 7, 1988, we were 
still doing last - minute rewrites on TZ3 
scripts currently in production. 

Paul Chitlik 
Jeremy Bertrand Finch 
Los Angeles, CA 


/. Michael Straczynski had this re- 
sponse. — Ed. 


On the issue of the series bible "Vision," 
the log of meetings and recorded drafts 
on file contradicts Finch and Chitlik. 
Our first meeting on this issue was Oc- 
tober 13, 1987. I arrived at that meeting 
with a twelve-page bible, which I had 
written entierly by myself, based on a 
one-page note from producer Mark Shel- 
merdine given to me when I was first 
hired. No input by them whatsoever 
had been made into that draft. At the 
request of the producer, I shortened the 
bible (again without their input) and 


delivered the revised draft on October 
23. Finch and Chitlik asked to review 
their contribution to that draft (as 
reflected in the drafts available at the 
office) which amounted to two sen- 
tences, one of which was, "The magic 
should come in early." That, and that 
alone, is the extent of their involvement 
in the writing of the series bible. 

The script they mention editing on 
October 7, 1988, was one written by 
two friends of theirs, which the produc- 
er and I had already decided to jettison. 
They continued to edit it strictly on their 
own, out of a desire to revive their 
friends' script for personal reasons. Re- 
garding their claims that they were sim- 
ply "transferred," anyone familiar with 
television can testify that you aren't 
just "transferred" off a going series in 
the middle of production in order to de- 
velop a purely speculative project. They 
were not "transferred." The producer's 
direct, verbatim comment to me was, 
"They're not working out; I'm going to 
have to let them go." Any subsequent 
arrangement was due to the producer's 
laudable desire not to leave them finan- 
cially high-and-dry. 

Finally, it is worth noting that Finch 
and Chitlik wrote only five scripts, the 
minimum number which the producer 
had to purchase under their contract. I 
insisted that my contract require only 
one script assignment. If I got more, I 
wanted it fo be because I earned them, 
and for no other reason— and my name 
appears on eleven episodes. It's hard to 
determine where they derive the "highly 
praised" part of their statement. If they 
are referring to outside reviews, only 
one of their scripts has aired as I write 
this, to absolutely no reviews what- 
soever. The only reviews of the show, 
quoted in an earlier column, were in 
direct response to an episode written 
by me and Haskell Barkin ("The Curi- 
ous Case of Edgar Witherspoon"). 

I do, however, strongly encourage 
viewers to watch the remaining four 
episodes by Finch and Chitlik ("The 
Trunk," "Stranger in Possum Meadows," 
"Father and Son Game" and "Room 
2426") so that their contributions to the 
show can be weighed on their own mer- 
its. It is said that failure is an orphan, 
and success has many fathers. But in 
the final analysis, claims and counter- 
claims are more or less meaningless, as 
are testimonials or articles written by 
me or anyone else. What endures is the 
judgment of viewers on the quality of 
the episodes, individually and collec- 
tively. . .which is exactly as it should be. 

J. Michael Straczynski 
Los Angeles, CA 


TWILIGHT ZONE 87 




BY THE NUMBERS 

As we've come to expect, Hollywood 
will offer us a rash of sequels in the 
next several months. Sigourney 
Weaver, Bill Murray, Harold Ramis, 
and the whole crew will be back for 
Columbia's Ghostbusters II: The Last 
of the Ghostbusters (due in July). 
William Shatner has tried his hand at 
directing Star Trek V: The Final Fron- 
tier (scheduled for release June 9), 
which he decided to make without 
the light-hearted — and sometimes 
heavy-handed — camp of its predeces- 
sor. You've probably already seen at 


A TALL TALE: Eric Idle and company 
in Terry Gilliam’s The Adventures 
of Baron Munchausen. Coming 
soon— yeah, that’s the ticket— 
real soon. 

least the trailer for The Fly II (I Was 
a Teenage Insect?) starring Mask's 
Eric Stoltz, as the kid who crawls out 
of his cocoon, and Spaceballs's Daph- 
ne Zuniga. Fright Night II, with more 
credible monsters than number one 
but not as many chuckles, was re- 
leased by N.C. /Vista in February. 
Robocop II should be out from Orion 
sometime this fall. Halloween V is 
scheduled for release in October, of 
course, although I wish they'd put 
this Michael guy to rest already. But 
on an exciting note, Harrison Ford 
and Sean Connery should make a 
fabulous team in Indiana Jones: The 
Last Crusade (scheduled for May 24). 
Connery plays Indy's dad. 



FASHIONS IN FANTASY 

In the wake of Willow, it seems fan- 
tasy film mongers might finally be 
ready to give the old quest epic a 
new turn, or to look on the book- 
shelves for inspiration. The Wolves of 
Willoughby Chase (not yet scheduled 
for release by Atlantic) is the film ver- 
sion of Joan Aiken's wonderful 
Grimm-like children's novel, starring 
Stephanie Beacham (villainess ex- 
traordinaire of Colbys fame) as the 
evil stepmother figure. Angelica 
Huston stars in Witches (due in May 
from Warner Brothers), directed by 
Nicholas ( The Man Who Fell to Earth ) 
Roeg and based on Roald Dahl's novel. 
Other fantasymongers are going for 
new angles on old themes — like 
witchhunting with a time -travel twist, 
in New World's Warlock (due in 
May). This film will have some splat- 
ter, a lot of darkness, and a reason- 
ably solid cast: Gothic's Julian Sands 
as the evil seventeenth-century war- 
lock, Withnail and I's Richard E. 

Grant as the witch-hunter, and Lori 
’( Footloose ) Singer as the love interest. 

And at last Terry ( Monty Python's 
Flying Circus, Brazil ) Gilliam's The 
Adventures of Baron Munchausen, 
which we told you about ages ago, 
and which may be the longest-delayed 
fantasy film on record, is coming to a 
theater near you. It was released in 
Germany to moderate success and 
should be here in March. And speak- 
ing of off-the-wall genre flicks, check 
out Young Einstein (released in Febru- 
ary), afWarner Brothers film, pro- 
duced, directed, and written by an 
Australian comic star named Yahoo 
Serious (seriously!). Also look for 
How to Get Ahead in Advertising 
(now playing), a comedy in which 
Warlock's Richard Grant grows 
another head as a result of a nasty 
skin condition. 


THE WRITE STUFF 

Some of the print writers we know 
are giving Tinseltown their best shot 
-with varying results. After wran- 
gling with 20th Century Fox a couple 
of years back over the film version of 
his novel Millenium, John Varley (see 
his story "Just Another Perfect Day" 
on p. 26 of this issue) said a 
vehement good-bye to Hollywood. 
The film, starring Kris Kristofferson 
and Cheryl Ladd, finally has been 
scheduled for April release. 

We hear cyberpunk-meister William 
(Neuromancer) Gibson's script for the 
third Alien film (not yet scheduled) is 
a real corker. Also Kathryn Bigelow 
(Near Dark ) is scheduled to do Gib- 
son's New Rose Hotel (a cyberpunk 
story first published in Omni), after 
she wraps Vestron's new cop movie 
Blue Steel. 

"Splat packer" David J. Schow is 
writing for the TV series Freddy's 
Nightmares. Also look for many fun- 
ny writer cameos in The Laughing 
Dead, a comedy gore flick produced 
by Somtow Sucharitkul (aka S.P. 
Somtow), in which Ed Bryant gets 
crushed by a bus. 


^ SANDS OF TIME: Gothic’s Julian 
Sands plays a dapper- but-nasty 
century-hopping villain in Warlock. 

© 1989 NEW WORLD ENTERPRISES 


▼ THE FINAL FRONTIER? William 
Shatner directing a Klingon in 
Star Trek V. But is it really the 
last hurrah? 


■EPING UP WITH THE 
NESES: Indiana Jones and the 
st Crusade— Harrison Ford and 
an Connery play “hunk and son.’ 

989 LUCASFILM LTD. 


© 1989 PARAMOUNT PICTURES CORP. 


r - 


4 



WET AND WILD 



Director John Cameron and producer 
Gale Ann Hurd are hard at work on 
The Abyss (set for July 4th release). 

It promises to be the best of a new 
wave of aqua-monster sf/horror 
films. As in The Terminator and 
Aliens, Cameron will set the visual 
tone of the film with his neat designs 
for sets, weapons, and whatever other 
futuristic doo-dads the story de- 
mands. But get out your water wings 
for the other "wet films" this year. 
Deep Star Six (released in January), a 
hare-brained undersea Alien clone 
complete with tacky prehistoric lob- 
ster, should have deep-sixed itself at 
the box office by now. There's more 
hope for MGM's Leviathan (released 
March 17), which appears to be a 
fishy clone of John Carpenter's The 
Thing with high production values. It 
stars Peter Weller (Robocop) and 
Richard Crenna. 


INNER TUBE 

The news from the small screen 
looks promising. For those of you who 
love fifties-style sf revamps like War 
of the Worlds, J. Michael Straczynski 
is working on a new made-for-syndi- 
cation version of V for Warner 
Brothers. I hope the lizard-people still 
get to eat those chocolate rats and 
tarantulas. And more aliens are com- 
ing to TV. Word is out that there's a 
syndicated Invasion of the Body 
Snatchers series in the works. 

On the classy side of TV syndica- 
tion, Shelley Duvall (producer of 
Showtime's Fairie Tale Theater) is 
working up a Nightmare Classics an- 
thology series for Showtime. She'll be 
dramatizing a few Poe stories and 
several other famous horror tales. Joe 
Straczynski is adapting Robert Louis 
Stevenson's Jekyll and Hyde for the 
series. 

^ BOY GENIUS: Australian comic 
Yahoo Serious writes, directs, and 
stars in Young Einstein, a wacky, 
down-under, historical fantasy. 




© 1989 PARAMOUNT PICTURES 

▲ MATERIAL GHOULS: Fred 


Gwynne (alias Herman Munster) 
stars in Pet Sematary. Madonna- 
video-alumna Mary Lambert 
replaced George Romero ( Night 
of the Living Dead) as director of 
King’s latest tilt at Hollywood. 


99 TWILIGHT ZONE 





A CYBER-SPLAT!: Vincent Klyn has 
flesh ap-peel as Cyborg’s leading 
body-disintegrating pirate. 


■ 




* 




wSxsiitbm# 


COMIC RELIEF 

On the heels of Roger Rabbit, a 
passle of cartoon and comic book 
heroes, from Bullwinkle's badguys 
Boris and Natasha (an Orion release, 
starring Sally Kellerman), to Batman 
and Spider-man, will soon be blazing 
across the silver screen. I'm sure all 
you mulch mavens will be glad to 
know that the Swamp Thing ( Return 
of the Swamp Thing, no distributor 
yet ) will be back, complete with 
Louis Jourdan as the reanimated and 
cloned Dr. Arcane. (Old villains - 
and actors — never die.) 

While we write this, Warner 
Brothers' much-awaited Batman, star- 
ring Michael Keaton, Jack Nicholson, 
and Kim Basinger is still in production, 
having experienced much technical 
difficulty. Script changes have 
abounded on this film. We hope they 
work it out soon — they've promised 
to release it in July. 

Here's one big scoop for us anima- 
tion lovers: Steven Spielberg has 
made an agreement with Warner 
Brothers to produce/direct some 
new cartoons, featuring the 
studio's classic characters. More 
power to him (as if he needs it). 

And Speaking of power, even though 
the Revlon Corporation bought 
Marvel Comics, thanks to a Cannon/ 
New World Pictures agreement, you 
can still expect to see Spider-man and 
Captain America movies in future 
months. Another Cannon project, 
Masters of the Universe II, got 
scrapped after they built the sets and 
arranged for big-time special effects. 
They found a "cyber-splat" script, re- 
named it Cyborg, and four weeks 
later. Cannon had a movie. With its 
flesh-dissolving pirates and non-stop 
fight sequences. Cyborg might make 
a good Saturday-night rental once it 
gets to video. (Which will be soon; it 
was released in February.) | 


◄ CREEP FROM THE DEEP: Amands 
Pays and Peter Weller try to slay 
a suspiciously Thingy-\ooking 
thing in Leviathan. 


TWILIGHT ZONE 91 



© 1988 UNIVERSAL PICTURES 


SCREEN 

CONTINUED FROM PAGE 17 



DON’T WORRY, BE PASSIVE: They Live’s aliens just want obedience, and 
perhaps some skin cream. 


ness to a level that a contemporary son- 
of-a-bitch — one toughened as a child by 
a technology that brought him visions 
of other children being slaughtered in 
Vietnam as he ate his TV dinners — 
would be able to understand. 

Unfortunately for the movie, the 
first of the Christmas Spirits is so much 
the best of them all, that the others, 
while quite good, are a bit of a let- 
down. The Ghost of Christmas Past is 
played with lethal joy and sublime vi- 
ciousness by dinky Carol Kane (I tell 
you, she was named for this movie!), 
all dolled up in a frothy little fairy 
dress and wearing teensy, filmy wings 
just like White Rock girl on the soda 
water bottles. 

She wears a mincing, wincey little 
smile, and crinkles her eyes up ever so 
jolly, and the first thing she does to 
Murray, to indicate she feels his mode 
of life does not live up to her expecta- 
tions of loving humanity and Christian 
forgiveness, is to sail across the room 
on her fluttering wings and give him a 
resounding wallop in the genitals. She 
thus demonstrates, without ado or 
bothersome subtlety, her basic schtick, 
which is that while she may be light as 
a feather, have the bones of a tiny spar- 
row, and skin of a near translucent 
paleness sprinkled with sparkly stars, 
she hits with the authority, and the 
same sickening thud, of a Mike Tyson. 
The whole routine between her and 


Murray— who plays off her with a 
snarling skill also lovely to behold — is 
something I will treasure and chuckle 
over for many Christmases to come. If 
you find your brotherly love slipping a 
little, friend, take a tip from your kind- 
ly old reviewer and see this prime ex- 
ample of moral instruction. 

The Ghost of Christmas Present is 
played with obvious enjoyment by 
David Johansen (aka "Buster Poindex- 
ter") as a skillfully scruffy cab driver. 
While his ectoplasmic Fifties cab with 
its cruddy Christmas decorations may 
not be quite up to sweet, dear little 
Carol (nothing is quite up to our Carol), 
it may be the second-best thing in the 
movie as it whizzes through darkness 
and delivery trucks with equal abandon. 

In defiance of convention, the 
death's-head skull of The Ghost of 
Christmas Future is not hidden — the 
movie is firmly dedicated to stamping 
out understatement whenever possible 
— and gets bigger and bigger and BIG- 
GER. The Marley-style ghost is played 
by John Forsythe (whose voice is, of 
course, perfect for a television execu- 
tive) in a mouldy golfer's outfit (he died 
in retirement on the links) with, frank- 
ly, rather disappointing dead-person 
makeup. Considering the generally high 
level of funny horrific effects in the 
movie. I'd have expected the makeup 
artists to have a little more imaginative 
fun with old Marley's rotting face. 


But, hey, is that in the Christmas 
spirit7 Go see the movie, gentle read- 
ers, even if it's got a few kinky little 
drawbacks, and, like, try to love your 
fellow man, okay? It's that or a holly 
stake through the heart next year, 
friend. 

Pull Down the Shades 

Old John Carpenter keeps hammering 
them out, and some are better than 
others. They Live (Universal) is not one 
of his best, but it does have a promising 
start and the first gropings of a fine 
paranoid film. 

The notion he's playing with is the 
comfy old idea that this mess we're in is 
really not our fault. You see, it isn't that 
we've been greedy and thoughtless and 
stupid and all that stuff. That isn't why 
the world is almost busted and our genes 
are bent out of whack— it's these here 
dam thangs, folks, these terrible, inhu- 
man critters from outer space that have 
put us in our present position. It's 
those devils made us do it! 

Of course, true to the tradition of 
this sort of story, poor, old, innocent 
mankind-at-large has no idea it's being 
preyed upon. But this film has a little 
group of human rebels who know the 
truth. They're plotting to free the rest 
of us and, wonder of wonders, (and here's 
the cute point and the only justification 
for the movie) have developed sunglass- 
es that enable their wearers to see the 
alien entities for what they are, namely 
corpsey-looking creatures with bulging 
metal eyes. 

A wandering construction worker, 
the very big Roddy Piper, comes across 
a set of these glasses and, after seeing 
how ugly and all-pervasive the aliens 
are, determinedly goes after them until 
he discovers the rebel group. Things go 
almost exactly the way they would if 
you left off reading this article and 
spent five minutes or so dreaming up 
the scenario yourself, except that you'd 
have to write in an endless (supposedly 
funny) fight between Piper and his 
equally huge pal Keith David, and end 
it with a really remarkably unconvinc- 
ing wrap-up— even for this genre. Actu- 
ally, I'm sure you're far too smart to 
come up with an ending as dumb as the 
one in the movie, so I'll break my usual 
policy of not giving away the ending 
and tell it to you in order to save you 
whatever exorbitant price the theaters 
and/or cassette renters are charging in 
your area. (If you want, you can stop 
here and try to figure it out, sort of like 
a crossword puzzle, before reading on 
and seeing if you can actually dream as 
poorly as a Hollywood hack.) 


92 TWILIGHT ZONE 



It turns out that the aliens have a 
technology so far in advance of ours 
it's like to make you sick with envy. 
They even have a wonderful gadget 
that transports you instantly to any 
place in the universe you want to go — 
there's a swell glimpse of it in action 
with a huge, ringed planet hanging in 
the sky. And it's presented so prettily 
by Carpenter that I decided then and 
there, to hell with the humans; I'll join 
up with that other bunch! These self- 
same high-tech aliens manage to main- 
tain their fiendish disguise and look 
pretty, just like us, only because of one 
solitary solo little tinsy gadget in the 
whole entire world, a kind of sparky 
lava lamp mounted all by itself and ex- 
posed to the elements on the roof of a 
building. Well, wouldn't you know it! 
Big old Rowdy Roddy Piper comes 
across it entirely by accident and shoots 
it with his last bullet and -that's it, 
that's all it takes! — the aliens are re- 
vealed to us for what they are, so now 
we can destroy them and live sensibly 
like we wanted to do all along. Totally 
awesome, right? I just know, if you 
played the game, that your ending had 
to be better than that. 

Sympathy for the Cenobites 

A while back I reviewed Clive Barker's 
Hellraiser in this column and opined 
that he had made a very promising 
start as a director of scary movies. I 
stay with that, but, after seeing Hell- 
bound: Hellraiser II (New World Pic- 
tures), I am afraid that I must regretful- 
ly add that he has unfortunately followed 
that up by making a noticeably bad de- 
but as a producer. 

In Hellhound, which is, indeed, an 
attempt to carry on with the gory 
events commenced in Hellraiser, Barker 
has entrusted his story to one Peter 
Atkins, screenwriter, and one Tony Ran- 
del, director. (Not the winsome TV 
comic, by the way. I had a brief mo- 
ment myself of wondering how a fellow 
like that had ever managed to get him- 
self involved in a project like this!) 
Friends, Barker's faith in them was ill- 
placed, and his attention to their doings 
either minimal or misguided, because 
nearly everything that could have gone 
wrong in Hellraiser (and which was, 
very much to his credit, narrowly 
avoided by Barker) does go wrong in 
Hellhound, and in precisely the ways 
you were happily relieved to see it not 
going wrong in the original effort. 

I suppose the most obvious con- 
trast between the two Hellraisers is in 
the heavy-handed humor which was, in 
the original, neatly sardonic and dry in 



order to offer quiet and skillful counter- 
point to the wash of blood all about. In 
Hellhound, an initial attempt is made 
to deliver the same kind of wit, but it 
falls apart with increasing speed, and it 
soon degenerates into such a shambles 
that in the end we are treated to the 
odd spectacle of increasingly bizarre 
monsters delivering Henny Youngman 
jokes. (The whole thing's not unlike 
watching a cheap car collapsing into sil- 
ly fragments as it rolls down the side of 
a hill.) It doesn't quite get to; "Take my 
tentacles . . please!" They don't get that 
good, actually -but they reach for it. 

There are some promising aspects 
to the film, but they are, each and every 
one, thoroughly sabotaged in the end. 
Kenneth Cranham, for instance, is 
quite good at the start playing a slick, 
purring, deeply perverted doctor who 
has managed to get himself a sanitari- 
um full of victims to play horrible 
games with. (This includes a bunch of 
really super crazies kept in a row of 
hidden cells in the basement next to the 
furnace.) But he is soon buried under 
so much makeup that almost anyone 
would do (and maybe did, who knows?), 
and his lines decline into the above- 
mentioned one-liners as well. Really 
quite a pity. 

The horrible creatures are over- 
done from the start. In the original 
there was a nice lean sparseness about 
them, and they were photographed 
hunched in lots of menacing shadow. In 
this unfortunate sequel, however, we 
see them spread-eagled in bright light 
like bugs. (I suppose the effects people 
were so proud they didn't want you to 


miss a thing.) They are fat and sprawl- 
ing and out of shape. They don't scare 
you, as they are supposed to do during 
the first part, and they don't make you 
laugh, as they try to do in the last part. 
(At least , I think they are trying to 
make you laugh.) 

The worst thing about the film, the 
really unforgiveable bit, is what it does 
with the truly gruesome notion of the 
Cenobites, a race of absolutely horrid 
entities who can get into your world 
and/or pull you into theirs and whose 
whole, sole purpose and delight in life 
is to hideously torture you with the ab- 
solute latest and most trendy S&M 
devices until you have been turned into 
dinky bits of gory flesh. Hellhound 
takes these hideous creations and turns 
the concept around and, by God, actu- 
ally sentimentalizes it, hard as that may 
be to believe, by revealing that they are 
not a ghastly, ghoulish race at all, but 
just a bunch of poor, misunderstood 
humans who made the perfectly under- 
standable mistake of getting interested 
in those tricky little puzzle boxes, poor 
dears. What with one thing leading to 
another, before they knew it, there they 
were looking ugly with all those nails 
in their faces and suchlike, and finding 
themselves torturing all those people - 
not that they really wanted to do it 
deep down inside, of course, and, real- 
ly, isn't it a shame? 

So I would suggest, most earnestly 
and sincerely, that Barker get out of the 
producing business and back into the 
directing business, and, for heaven's 
sake, stop listening to all that bad ad- 
vice! ■ 


HOOKS AND BLADDERS; Hellhound’s Kenneth Cranham Ceno-bites off 
more than he can chew. 


TWILIGHT ZONE 93 


© 1988 NEW WORLD ENTERPRISES 


ft 

>. ' It 

BOOKS 

CONTINUED FROM PAGE 15 

0-380-75500-9). Here are ten new sto- 
ries plus four classic reprints, all horroc 
tales taking place in hot, sweaty climes. 
The reprints include such work as Avram 
Davidson's "Where Do You Live, Queen 
Esther?", a concise, concentrated tale of 
benign voodoo, aggressive white ignor- 
nance, and duppy death. 

The originals range over a wide 
spectrum, from Gene Wolfe's "Houston, 
1942," an eerie story of twisted child- 
hood, to Charles Sheffield's "Dead Meat," 
an adventure of lust and murder set in 
Borneo that is a lineal descendant of 
the sort of men's magazine tale Harlan 
Ellison and many others used to write 
in the Fifties. Steve Rasnic Tern contrib- 
utes "Grim Monkeys," a parable of chil- 
dren lost, set in Venezuela. Pat Cadi- 
gan's "It Was the Heat" is a lush, sweaty 
tale of the sensuality and decadence 
twining about a female executive visit- 
ing New Orleans. Other contributions 
include stories by Brian Aldiss, Ian 
Watson, George Alec Effinger, and others, 
as well as poetry by Robert Frazier and 
Bruce Boston. The uncreditqd cover 
painting is particularly notable, evok- 
ing, as it does, the same attractive air 
of class as the publisher's Latin Ameri- 
can fiction series. 

2am Publications is an ambitious 
fledgling small press in the Midwest. 
They have just published a chapbook 
called Wishes and Fears by David Starkey 
(2am Publications, P.O. Box 6754, Rock- 
ford, IL 61125-1754, $4.95, 48 pp„ ISBN 
0-937491-01-2). This perfect-bound trade 
paperback contains an original novelette 
about a young boy who lives with his 
embittered and abandoned mother, loves 
animals, and one day discovers a wound- 
ed, chained griffin off in the woods. 
Befriending the unpredictable griffin 
leads to grim results as the legendary 
beast starts taking a stem accounting of 



those who have given the human boy 
grief. Although the book starts well in 
vintage Bradbury territory, it unfortu- 
nately mires itself in increasingly pe- 
destrian writing. Hard to tell whether 
it's author or publisher who believes 
that "strided" is the past tense of stride, 
and that a "wheel barrel" is synonymous 
with wheelbarrow. I don't mean to pick. 
What's more serious is that the poten- 
tially very human and affecting story of 
a boy who loves all helpless creatures 
funnels too rapidly into an artificially 
forced ending where the frisson — rather 
than generating from the artful placement 
of the writer's story elements — comes 
instead from a clumsily structured oh- 
my-God-so-fhof's-what's-going-on revel- 
ation, involving the reading of a con- 
venient book. Mr. Starkey demon- 
strates real promise, but perhaps he is 
not yet ready for a book all to himself 
where any weakness is more likely to 
call attention to itself. 

If David Starkey evokes a bit of 
Bradbury as Wishes and Fears start off. 
Brad Strickland conjures a wonderful 
Michael Bishop-style landscape in Shad- 
owshow (Onyx Books, $3.95, 372 pp., 
ISBN 0-451-40109-3). Shadowshow is 
set in the smalltown Georgia of 1957. 
Sputnik's up there and folks are wor- 
ried. In the little town of Gaither, yet 
another burg with a hideous secret, the 
mysteries stranger, Athaniel Badon, comes 
to town to buy the boarded-up State 
Theatre. The previous owner now en- 
dures an institution where author Strick- 
land, in a wonderful cameo of cinemat- 
ic hell, describes the inner content of 
the character's catatonia: "How can they 
know that he watches insane, horrify- 
ing, disjointed Hopalong Cassidy movies 
in his head all the time now?" If all the 
writing in this novel were that brilliant, 
this review would be one long rave. 

Sadly, while Shadowshow is pleas- 
ant enough, it mostly affords the plea- 
sure of the overly familiar. I've seen all 
this before. So have you. It's not terri- 
bly mysterious why the malevolent Mr. 
Badon's back in town. The device of the 
midnight show where movie patrons 
get to preview the (usually) awful acts 
they're going to commit doesn't come 
through as either all that fresh or even 
terribly integral to the plot. Maybe that's 
the problem: focus. All the elements of 
the big, best-selling, point-of-purchase 
horror bonanza are here. Shadowshow' s 
got atmosphere. It's got a serviceable 
but unsurprising plot. It's got one of 
those lengthy cast lists that looks as 
long as the passenger manifest for the 
Titanic Too many of the characters 
have labels pasted on their foreheads. 



Labels like "Lunch." Too often the gloss, 
the perfunctory, the superficial is the 
brush used to letter that label. Andy 
McCory, the duped Renfield-like hu- 
man minion of the nasty Mr. Badon, 
mostly twirls a metaphorical moustache, 
save for one scene toward the end when 
he seems genuinely affected by the 
death of his child. This is not to say 
that the other characters are intrinsical- 
ly dull or even uninteresting. It's just 
that they seem constantly struggling for 
air. Fresh air. This is another one where 
you strain and root for the author all 
the way; then finally pack it in and go 
out to the kitchen where you find the 
power's gone off, the refrigerator's de- 
funct, and the beer's turned all warm. 

Finally, if you don't have a copy of 
J.G. Ballard's new story collection. 
Memories of the Space Age (Arkham 
House, $16.95, 216 pp., ISBN 0-87054- 
157-9), your book collection — and your 
life — is incomplete. Got that? Memories 
is a perfect gem of a book, from the Max 
Ernst jacket and J.K. Potter interior il- 
lustrations to Ballard's octet of post- 
modern fictions about the dulling of 
edges, the bitter thwarting of expecta- 
tions, and the dying of the dream as 
the shattered fantasies of humanity's 
conquest of space litter the parched 
sands of Cape Canaveral. Ballard 
shows us devastated human wreckage 
lurching across the mindscapes in sto- 
ries as old as "The Cage of Sand" 
(1962), as recent as "The Man Who 
Walked on the Moon" (1985). By turns 
melancholy and obsessed, Ballard deals 
us resonances from a deck of archetypes. 
There is adventure here indeed — 
emotional, intellectual, and aesthetic 
Don't concern yourself that Memories 
of the Space Age will probably not be 
endorsed gleefully by the L-5 Society. ■ 


94 TWILIGHT ZONE 


TERROR 

CONTINUED FROM PAGE 20 

ing Dead, an audio dramatization from 
Simon & Schuster, is less successful. 
The narrator speaks infrequently, and 
when he does it is during the most 
climactic parts of the story. He has lines 
like ". . .exposing things that never 
should be seen by man." (I know I want 
to see them, and I assume you do, 
too.) The performers have a tendency 
to overact. I have seen people listen to 
this tape and quiver with suppressed 
giggles and excitement at the tacky pre- 
sentation, eating up every ridiculous mo- 
ment. So if you're the type who enjoys 
laughing at good, trashy horror, you'll 
love Night of the Living Dead. 

Now for the contemporary stuff. 
All the novels you've waited for in print 
are coming out on audio cassette almost 
as fast. The first part of Stephen King's 
Dark Tower series. The Gunslinger, is 
still on the stands, and part two. The 
Drawing of the Three, was released in 
January by New Audio Library. The 
Dark Tower novels are all full-length 
readings by King himself. Just think: 
six hours and sixteen minutes of King's 
distinctive nasal voice. Actually it's a 
treat to hear an author read his or her 
own work, and King does a fine job 
with this series. 

For those of you who love Stephen 
King, his tapes are almost everywhere. 
The classic tales from Nightshift are 
available from Random House. Gramma 
is a good one to buy if you like child- 
hood fear, or if you like scaring little 
children. The Mist is probably one of 
the best King tapes around; it's com- 
pletely dramatized in "3-D" sound. When 
you're wearing earphones the three- 
hundred and sixty-degree sound repro- 
duction creates a spacial reality similar 
to the way your ears really hear— 
above, below, front, back, right, left. 
You can imagine how deliciously dis- 
gusting some horror effects are in 3-D 
sound. I didn't buy it at first, but after 
1 heard a good ten-second 3-D stran- 
gling, I was sold. 

3-D sound is especially fitting for 
The Mist. The producers strive for total 
realism, and it works. People scream 
and you can hear their voices fading 
away in the distance. Creatures fall 
from ceiling to floor, and you can actu- 
ally hear them splat below. And the 
mist itself. . .is alive, it creeps, crawls, 
and slithers. What created this unnatu- 
ral fog? The top secret government op- 
eration? Perhaps. It doesn't matter what 
caused it, all that matters is getting out. 
You and dozens of others are trapped in 
a supermarket, alone with a raving reli- 
gious freak, hungry children, a love 
interest— and tentacles. You won't last 


long inside, but outside is the mist, 
represented by a chilling audio sound 
effect. You can feel it all around, heavy, 
cold, and breathing .... 

Random House offers Annie Rice's 
tales of the undead: Interview with the 
Vampire and Queen of the Damned. Si- 
mon & Schuster has V.C. Andrews's 
thriller Flowers in the Attic, the story 
of the perfect American family's plunge 
into a fairy tale-gone-mad. Also from 
Simon & Schuster is Dean R. Koontz's 
Lightning. This one will appeal to you 
folks who like a taste of science fiction 
in your horror. ("The first time light- 
ning strikes, it saves a life The sec- 

ond time lightning strikes, the terror 
starts. . . . The third time lightning 
strikes, hell breaks loose.") What en- 
sues is a suspenseful chase across the 
boundaries of time. 

Clive Barker is also available on 
tape. In fact. Barker reads his most fa- 
mous work. The Hellhound Heart -a 
tale of Hell and of the people who come 
to discover that dreadful place as a re- 
sult of the unbearable ennui they feel 
existing on earth. Earthly pleasures just 
aren't enough for these folks, and nei- 
ther are earthly pains. This is the tale 
that evolved into the films Hellraiser 
and Hellhound: Hellraiser II. If you en- 
joyed the films, I have a suspicion you 
will appreciate the tape even more. The 
tape includes some rather graphic and 
disturbing scenes that provide an extra 
ripeness to The Hellhound Heart. The 
Cenobites are not quite as hip as they 
were in the films: their skin is gnarled 
and their garb is less like that found in 
a death-rock club. But on tape. Barker's 
Hell becomes more sticky and damp 
than it was in the films, and more hor- 
rifically decadent. 

Another story of Hell from Barker 
is The Damnation Game, an abridged 
narration available from Books on 
Tape. It abounds in soul collecting, 
mind control and all that good stuff. By 
far the best sound effect I heard was on 
the Barker tape of The Inhuman Condi- 
tion, available through Simon & 
Schuster: A man graphically hits the 
pavement after a fourteen-story fall, 
along with hundreds of severed hands. 
Try doing that on the big screen. Get 
out your earphones for this one! 

That's just a sampling of the hor- 
rors available on audio. A larger selec- 
tion is listed at the end of this section. 
Since this sort of "dark" horror is so 
compelling, I have one piece of advice 
for you. Take your time and work slow- 
ly through the tapes. Start with one 
you can handle before testing the limits 
of your endurance. Bon voyage! ■ 


SKIFFY 

CONTINUED FROM PAGE 21 

admit that since audio fiction reaches the 
ears, it ought to be appealing to them. 
A good audio should be able to make 
you ignore the shriek of metal on met- 
al. So argued my media kid, who has 
been spoiled by CD sound. 

When I listened to the first tape, 
the train wasn't too crowded, so my 
intellectual side was dominant. It chose 
to begin with the author-narrated tapes 
because, it reasoned, they should most 
closely reflect the author's work. 

The Writer’s Voice 

I put the banquet scene from Frank 
Herbert's Dune in the tape player and 
scanned the "liner notes," written by the 
author. He selected the banquet scene 
because he felt it best conveys the polit- 
ical theme of his novel. Though I agreed, 
it seemed to me that the excerpt would 
be baffling to anyone discovering Dune 
for the first time. Headphones on, I 
smiled knowingly and probably looked 
very thoughtful. Herbert's hard conson- 
ants and intense drone made the piece 
delightfully biting and witty. The men- 
tal calisthenics at the Atreides dinner 
table unfolded like a picture book. The 
media kid was entertained by most of 
it, and the intellectual felt enriched. 

Then I tried Theodore Sturgeon's 
"The Fabulous Idiot," a story from his 
novel. More Than Human. Again, both 
personas were happy. The intellectual 
loved heading the lush texture of Stur- 
geon's language in his gentle, uninflect- 
ed voice. And although the kid was 
tired of the hiss on these author-nar- 
rated tapes, she thought the fairy-tale 
atmosphere was really neat. The next 
time I pulled out my headphones for a 
listen, it was eight-forty-seven on some 
middle-of-the-week morning. I was one 
of far too many human sardines on the 
stone-still R train. The media child was 
really antsy. So I tossed her some upscale 
candy — Douglas (The Hitch-Hiker's 
Guide to the Galaxy) Adams, reading 
his new genre hybrid, Dirk Gently 's 
Holistic Detective Agency. I giggled 
and guffawed all the way to work— 
which was only slightly embarrassing 
on the subway, where wackiness is pret- 
ty normal. Adams has a wonderfully 
sardonic Monty Python-esque delivery, 
which makes his fabulously improbable 
concepts as believable as the evening 
news. 

On a sunny Saturday train ride to 
my_ parents' abode in New Jersey, my 
resident intellectual ruled; she ap- 
proached Isaac Asimov's Foundation's 
Edge, read by the man himself, with 
quiet reverence. But when it was over, 
the TV twelve-year-old complained. It's 


TWILIGHT ZONE 95 


SKIFFY 


not that Asimov isn't a wonderful racon- 
teur, but he is from around these parts r 
and his rich New York accent made it 
hard for me to escape from the stench 
of the Meadowlands and into his epic 
of galactic politics. Even the aesthetic 
perfectionist objected; the form — the 
sound of his words — didn't seem suited 
to their content. Guiltily, I reach for an- 
other Asimovian effort. The Gods Them- 
selves, narrated by Gale Garnett. In 
surprise, the media kid woke up and 
pulled out her sentimental hankie. 
Asimov's squooshy energy-eating alien 
fighting to save the sun from supernova 
really touched my heart. Why? Well, the 
alien was involved in a perfectly messy, 
perfectly human love triangle. 

After hearing the author-narrated 
tapes, the intellectual purist was resting 
easy, feeling that audio could indeed be 
a safe place for sf. But the junk-food 
junkie kid was ready for— you guessed 
it— her next twenty-minute fix of enter- 
tainment. Maybe, she thought, the dra- 
matizations would be more like Star 
Trek, with actors and maybe some mu- 
sic or even cool sound effects. While 
she was busy contemplating this idea, 
though, the sneaky intellectual snatched 
up a classic 

The Sounds of Science 

It was H. G. Wells's The Time Machine 
— primaeval science fiction. The profes- 
sor in my head got nostalgic I pressed 
"play." And frowned. And began to 
chuckle. The tape started with electron- 
ic music— pulpy stuff like something 
out of Forbidden Planet. The narrator 
and actors began, speaking in that upper- 
crusty Brit accent John Cleese and Com- 
pany love to spoof. Then there was this 
cello riff sending me to foggy Victorian 
London. But then, as the Time Traveler 
sped into the future, the electronic mu- 
sic and the overacting zapped me right 
to the chilly plastic set of Space 1999. 
When the tape ended, I felt guilty for 
laughing. A classic shouldn't be campy. 
The smarty-pants purist returned, tsk- 
tsk-ing at the media kid, who snapped, 
"Oh, yeah7 Take this!" and shoved a hi- 
tech tape into the machine. 

Here it was, my first taste of true 
"state-of-the-art" audio, Isaac Asimov's 
brainchild , Robot City (written by poor 
Michael P. Kube-McDowell, whose name 
on the box is nearly microscopic). Its star, 
Peter MacNichol ( Sophie's Choice), 
sounded a little like Mark Hamill. (Ro- 
mantic sigh from the kid.) But most of 
all, the kid was in sound-effects ecstasy. 
Laser cannons blasted; robots clanked 
toward me; turbo lifts whirred down 
into the bowels of a space complex; 


spaceships whistled and hummed through 
the void. ("Hey, they can't really do 
that," admonished the intellectual, but 
the kid was having too much fun to lis- 
ten.) And this tape, I thought, was only 
the first in a series. The kid can't wait 




for the next one. My only complaint 
was that the evil alien had a vaguely 
Russian accent, throwing glasnost to 
the wind. Even so, the couch potato kid 
was psyched for more, picked out vol- 
ume one of The Omni Audio Experi- 
ence, and flipped it into the tape player. 

As you might guess from the title, 
this particular tape was set up in a 
magazine format. It includes a Ray 
Bradbury story from The Martian 
Chronicles, 'And The Moon Be Still as 
Bright" ("Gosh-wow," said the kid), and 
a Bradbury interview. Both halves of 
my brain went right for the story. And 
rose up to heaven. My resident intellec- 
tual remarked upon the fact that every- 
thing — special effects, music, acting, 
and narration was done subtly and with 
great respect for Bradbury's poetic style. 
The media kid just oohed and aahed at 
the yummy new-age music, which made 
fantastic pictures flash in my head. The 
intellectual enjoyed the interview, but 
thought, if these people can make au- 
dio fiction so well, why do anything 
else? 

The next Omni audio volume had 
Arthur C. Clarke's "Rescue Party" on it. 
In amazement, the mushy media kid 
pulled out the hankie again. A Clarke 
story that makes you cry? Never hap- 
pened to me before. The sound effects 
and the music, the excellent acting, all 
built a vivid landscape in my head, 
thrilling the kid. Then came the part of 
the story when humanity did, after all. 


find the gumption and good sense to 
save itself. This was it, I thought, wip- 
ing tears from my eyes, the reason 1 
love science fiction. I dared the other 
subway travelers to stare at me. I was a 
nerd — and proud of it. 

My didactic purist was feeling ma- 
ternal; she patted the sobbing child on 
the head, wondering if all this emotion 
was too much for her. Knowing that 
Arthur C. Clarke is usually more nuts- 
and-boltsy, the intellectual decided to 
try another Clarke tape to calm the kid 
down. It was Random House's 2061: 
Odyssey Three. Although this presen- 
tation lacked the sound effects of the 
Omni cassette, the intellectual enjoyed 
herself, and the child was soothed by 
the transitional synthesizer chords. And 
as an added bonus, Frank Langella nar- 
rates this tape! My romantic media kid 
loved him in Dracula (love isn't quite 
the right word); he could probably sell 
her anything with that velvety voice. 
Langella also knows how to convey sci- 
ence fiction's sense of wonder. 2061 had 
just enough auditory sensuality to evoke 
the material's strange settings. Still, the 
way I felt about 2061 was nothing com- 
pared to my reaction to the last tape. 

In the Beginning Was the Word 

It was J.R.R. Tolkien reading his own 
works. The Hobbit and the Fellowship 
of the Ring. Okay, I know this isn't 
science fiction, but the kid couldn't re- 
sist listening to it. And for giving in to 
her childish impatience, my internal in- 
tellectual was rewarded with a vivid, 
wondrous aesthetic experience. I'd like 
to talk more about the Tolkien tape 
here, but such a discussion will have to 
wait for another column. Suffice it to 
say that Tolkien brought me back to 
what the art of storytelling is all about: 
the power of the word to paint pictures, 
to impart compelling, archetypal tales. 
The tape proved to both of my perso- 
nas that the spoken language alone can 
have its own magic, its own music and 
"sound effects." But what prose it has to 
be, and what a voice the author/nar- 
rator has to have to impress the media- 
saturated kid in all of us. 

It is inevitable that as more publish- 
ing companies produce fiction on tape, 
they will use sound effects to cover up 
weaknesses in stories, just as movie 
makers use special effects these days. 
Still, since audio is a growing medium, 

I hope its producers will continue to ex- 
plore all of its sensual qualities and still 
keep my media-junkie self saying "Gol- 
ly Gee!" But both the media kid and the 
intellectual snob will vouch for this: You 
can't beat the punch of a good story. ■ 


96 TWILIGHT ZONE 




DIMENSIONS OF SOUND 


To help you enter the audio dimension, 
we've listed a selection of some of the more 
interesting horror and sf recordings current- 
ly available. If you don't see what you're 
looking for here, write to the publishing 
companies for their catalogues or call them 
to order. You'll find the numbers and ad- 
dresses at the bottom of this page. 


HORROR 

Classics 

Bierce, Ambrose: An Occurrence at Owl 
Creek Bridge; Edited by Jonathan Katz; 
Performance by Eartha Kitt, James Gunn 
[CA] 

De Maupassant, Guy: Was it a Dream? [LL] 
Jacobs, W.W.: The Monkey 's Paw and The 
Interruption; Performance by Anthony 
Quayle 1CA] 

Lovecraft, H.P.: The Haunter of the Dark 
(abridged); Performance by David 
McCallum [CA] 

Poe, Edgar Allan: The Fall of the House of 
Usher and Other Works; Performance by 
Basil Rathbone [CA] 

Poe, Edgar Allan: The Pit and the Pendu- 
lum and Other Works; Performance by 
Basil Rathbone [CA] 

Poe, Edgar Allan: The Masque of the Red 
Death and Other Poems and Tales of 
Edgar Allan Poe; Performance by Basil 
Rathbone [CA] 

Shelley, Mary Wollenstonecraft: Franken- 
stein (abridged and fully dramatized) 

[SA] 

Shelley, Mary Wollenstonecraft: Franken- 
stein (unabridged) [BT] 

Stevenson, Robert Louis: The Strange Case 
of Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde; Performance 
by Anthony Quayle [CA] 

Stoker, Bram: Dracula [SA] 

Modern 

Andrews, V.C.: Flowers in the Attic; Perfor- 
mance by Dorothy Lyman [SS] 

Bloch, Robert: Psycho [LL] 

King, Stephen: Dark Tower: The Gunslinger 

[NA] 

King, Stephen: Dark Tower: The Drawing 
of the Three [NA] 

King, Stephen: Gramma [RH] 

King, Stephen: The Mist (in 3-D sound); 

Fully dramatized [SS] 

King, Stephen: The Monkey [RH] 

King, Stephen: Nightshift [RH] 

King, Stephen: Skeleton Crew [RH] 

King, Stephen: Stories from Nightshift [RH] 
Koontz, Dean R.: Lightning; Performance 
by Peter Marinker [SS] 


Rice, Anne: Interview with the Vampire; 
Performance by F. Murray Abraham 
[RH] 

Rice, Anne: Queen of the Damned; Perfor- 
mance by Kate Nelligan [RH] 

Romero, George: Night of the Living Dead; 
Fully dramatized [RH] 

Cutting Edge 

Barker, Clive: The Damnation Game; Per- 
formance by Clive Barker [RH] 

Barker, Clive: The Hellhound Heart; Perfor- 
mance by Clive Barker [SS] 

Barker, Clive: The Body Politic (in 3-D 
sound); Performance by Kevin Conway 
[SS] 

Barker, Clive: The Inhuman Condition; Ful- 
ly dramatized [SS] 

Straub, Peter: Koko; Performance by James 
Woods [SS] 

Winter, Douglas E., editor: Prime Evil: A 
Taste for Blood; Performance by Ed 
Begley, Jr. [SS] 


SF 

Dawn Age 

Pioneers of Science Fiction: (Includes H.G. 
Wells's The Time Machine, fully drama- 
tized; Arthur C. Clarke's The Sentinel, a 
simple narration; and Jules Verne's 20,000 
Leagues Under the Sea, fully dramatized) 
[SA] 

Verne, Jules: foumey to the Center of the 
Earth (abridged); Performance by James 
Mason [CA] 

Wells, H.G.: The War of the Worlds; Per- 
formance by Leonard Nimoy |CA] 

Grand Masters 

Asimoy Isaac: The Gods Themselves [RH] 
Asimov Isaac: Foundation's Edge (abridged 
w/music); Performance by Isaac Asimov 
[CA] 

Bradbury, Ray: The Illustrated Man; Perfor- 
mance by Leonard Nimoy [CA] 

Bradbury, Ray: The Small Assassin; Perfor- 
mance by Ray Bradbury [CA] 

Simak, Clifford: 'Aesop'' from City; Perfor- 
mance by Clifford Simak [CA] 

Sturgeon, Theodore: "The Fabulous Idiot" 
from More Than Human; Performance 
by Theodore Sturgeon [CA] 

Clarke, Arthur C.: Childhood's End [RH] 
Clarke, Arthur C.: Rendezvous With Rama 
[RH] 

Heinlein, Robert A.: The Green Hills of 
Earth and Space Jockey [RH] 

Heinlein, Robert A.: The Cat Who Walks 
Through Walls; Performance by Robert 


Vaughn [SS] 

Herbert, Frank: Battles of Dune; Perfor- 
mance by Frank Herbert [CA] 

Herbert, Frank: Dune: The Banquet Scene; 
Performance by Frank Herbert [CA] 

Modern 

Adams, Douglas: Dirk Gently s Holistic 
Detective Agency; Performance by 
Douglas Adams [SS] 

McIntyre, Vonda N.: Star Trek: The Entro- 
py Effect; Performance by George Takei 
and Leonard Nimoy [SS] 

McIntyre, Vonda N.: Star Trek: The First 
Adventure; Performance by Leonard Nimoy 
and George Takei [SS] 

McIntyre, Vonda N.: Star Trek IV: The 
Voyage Home; Performance by George 
Takei and Leonard Nimoy [SS] 

Hi-Tech 

Asimov, Isaac: Isaac Asimov's Robot City: 
Volume I: Odyssey by Michael P. Kube- 
McDowell; Performance by Peter Mac- 
Nichol [CA] 

The Omni Audio Experience, Vol. 1: In- 
cludes Ray Bradbury's 'And the Moon 
Be Still as Bright" and "Off Season" from 
The Martian Chronicles, and an inter- 
view with Ray Bradbury [OA] 

The Omni Audio Experience, Vol. 2: In- 
cludes Arthur C. Clarke's "Rescue Party" 
[OA] 

AUDIO PUBLISHERS 

The above listings are coded according to 
their publishers: 

BT Books on Tape, P.O. Box 7900, New- 
port Beach, CA 92658-7900; 
1-800-626-3333 

CA Caedmon, 1995 Broadway, New York, 
NY 10023; 1-800-638-3030; in Pennsyl- 
vania, 1-800-982-4377 
LL Listening Library, One Park Avenue, 
Old Greenwich, CT 06870; 

1-800-243-4504 

LP Listen for Pleasure, One Columbia 
Drive, Niagara Falls, NY 14305; 
1-800-451-9518 

NA New American Audio, 1633 Broadway, 
New York, NY 10019; (201) 387-0600 
OA Omni, Audio Dept., 200 N. 12th St., 
Newark, NJ 07107; 1-800-221-1777 
RH Random House Audio, 201 E. 50th 
St., New York, NY 10022; 1-800-638-6460 
SA Spoken Arts, P.O. Box 289, New 
Rochelle, NY 10802; 1-800-537-3617 
SS - Simon & Schuster Audio, 1230 Ave- 
nue of the Americas, New York, NY 
10021; (201) 767-5937 ■ 




TWILIGHT ZONE 97 



CLASSIFIEDS 

TZ Classifieds bring results! Reaching nearly 350,000 readers,* they’re one of the magazine 
world's biggest bargains. The cost, payable in advance, is $2.00 per word ($2.50 for words 
FULLY CAPITALIZED). There is a twenty-word minimum; phone numbers with area codes count 
as one word. (No discounts are applicable.) Please send your ad copy, with payment, to: Twilight 
Zone Magazine, Att’n.: Belinda Davila, Classified Ad Dept., 401 Park Avenue South, New York, 
NY 10016-8802. Deadline for the Aug. 1989 issue is April 1, 1989; for the Oct. 1989 issue, 


it’s June 1, 1989. 

'Globe Research Subscriber Survey, 1987 


BOOKS/MAGAZINES/CATALOGS 

WORLD’S LARGEST OCCULT, Mystic arts, 
Witchcraft, Voodoo. 7000 curios, gifts, books. 3 
fascinating 1989 catalogs, $1.00. By airmail, 
$2.00. Worldwide Curio House, Box 17095T, 
Minneapolis, MN 55417. 

STEPHEN KING COLLECTIBLESI Over 150 
magazine appearances (stories— articles— inter- 
views); first editions; movie and book promo 
material. Write for an amazing 10-page list: 
TIME TUNNEL, 313 Beechwood Ave., Middle- 
sex, NJ 08846. 

OCCULT CATALOG. 270 Pages! Oer 10,000 
books, jewelry, herbs, oils, candles, religious 
goods, metaphysical supplies. Catalog $1.00. In- 
ternational Imports. 236-A West Manchester Ave- 
nue, Los Angeles, CA 90003. 

HMMO DIFFERENT MOVIE A MOVIE STAR 
POSTERS. Catalog $2.00. Mnemonics LTD., 
Dept. “K.” #9, 3600 21 St. NE, Calgary, 
Alta., T2E 6V6, CANADA. Credit card orders 
1-800-661-9482. 

I’VE BEEN SELLING reasonably priced out-of- 
print fantasy paperbacks, hardcovers, and 
magazines since 1967. Write for my free month- 
ly catalogs. Pandora’s Books, Box T-54, Neche, 
ND 58265. 


FREE MOVIE POSTER CATALOG! Old and 

new. Fast service /Lowest prices. Luton’s, 
Box 27621-T, Memphis, TN 28127. 


IS THE CENTAURI PARTICLE THE ULTIMATE 
PARTICLE IN THE UNIVERSE? FOR MORE 
INFORMATION, SEND $9.95 TO: Dr. Bertram 
Brown, 47 W. Mercury Blvd., Hampton, VA 23669. 


VAMPIRE VIGNETTES©: Quarterly fiction jour- 
nal for horror/vampire buffs. Unusual fiction, 
yearly contests, book reviews, more! Yearly sub- 
scription (4 issues) $12.00, V 2 year (2 issues, 
Fall/Winter or Spring/Summer) $6.00. Single is- 
sue $3.00. Sample copy $2.50. V.v. Press, P.O. 
Box 682, E. Long., MA 01028. 


BEST IN MOVIE POSTERS— ALL CURRENT 
RELEASES — 1940’s to present — Sci/Fi-Horror- 
Foreign-Rock. Best selection— lowest prices. $2 
catalog. WORLD OF CINEMA, 488 Henley 
Ave., New Milford, NJ 07646. 


BARKER , KINO , KOONTZ , LAN8PALE and 

many other Horror/Dark Fantasy authors avail- 
able in limited first editions— PARK HARVEST 
TITLES — and paperbacks. Numerous. Send 
S.A.S.E. for current list. Michael Sellard, Box 
836, Hallandale, FL 33008. 


STARDATE. S.F. bulletin. Trivia, news, astrono- 
my. $1.50 or $18 a year subl Pen pal ads want- 
ed. $5.00, 4 lines, 50 spaces. Stardate, 3646 
Sandra N., Salem, OR 97303. 


STEPHEN KING Books For Sale: many first 
editions. Write to: Al Aiello, Box 1045 Pawtucket, 
Rl 02862 or call 401-725-8252. 


SERVICES 


WITCHCRAFTS Harness its powers. Gavin and 
YVonne will teach you how. Box 1502-TZ, New 
Bern, NC 28560. 


MISCELLANEOUS 


GET PAID for mailing letters! $200.00 daily. Write: 
PAASE-MF9, 161 Lincolnway, North Aurora, IL 
60542. 


GET PAID for reading books! Write: Pase — BV8, 
161 Lincolnway, North Aurora, IL 60542. 


PURITAN’S PRIDE— Discount-priced natural vita- 
mins. Free catalog. Over 400 items. Natural vita- 
mins, diet and beauty aids, all at fantastic 
factory-direct prices. Puritan Pride Dept. TZ, 90 
Orvile Dr., Bohemia, NY 11716. 





TZ QUIZ ANSWERS 

CONTINUED FROM PAGE 42 

ANSWERS 

IL. Richard Matheson, screenwriter 
2E. John Badham, director/producer 
3F. George Clayton Johnson, 
screenwriter 

4K. Charles Beaumont, screenwriter 
5J. Rod Serling, screenwriter 
61. Robert Bloch, screenwriter 
7H. Buck Houghton, producer 
8B. Richard Donner, director 
9C. Douglas Heyes, screenwriter 
10G. Joe Alves, art director 
11A. Steven Spielberg, director 
12D. Jeannot Szwarc, director 

BONUS QUESTION: 

PATTERNS 


98 TWILIGHT ZONE